astm-vol-02-02-aluminum-and-magnesium-alloys

Prévia do material em texto

Designation: B 26/B 26M – 03
Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 26/B 26M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification2 covers aluminum-alloy sand castings
designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 This specification is not intended for aluminum-alloy
sand castings used in aerospace applications.
1.3 Alloy and temper designations are in accordance with
ANSI H35.1 and H35.1M. Unified Numbering System alloy
designations are in accordance with Practice E 527.
1.4 Unless the order specifies the “M” specification desig-
nation, the material shall be furnished to the inch-pound units.
1.5 For acceptance criteria for inclusion of new aluminum
and aluminum alloys and their properties in this specification,
see Annex A1 and Annex A2.
1.6 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
are to be regarded separately as standards. The SI units are
shown in brackets or in separate tables or columns. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
system must be used independent of the other. Combining
values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
with the specification.
1.7 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applicabil-
ity of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 179 Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and
Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes3
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought3
B 557 Test Methods for Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products3
B 557M Test Methods for Tension Testing Wrought and
Cast Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products [Metric]3
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products3
B 881 Terminology Relating to Aluminum- and
Magnesium-Alloy Products3
B 917/B 917M Practice for Heat Treatment of Aluminum-
Alloy Castings from All Processes3
D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum Base-Alloys6
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition6
E 94 Guide for Radiographic Testing7
E 155 Reference Radiographs for Examination of Alumi-
num and Magnesium Castings7
E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination7
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)8
E 607 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
Point-to-Plane Technique, Nitrogen Atmosphere6
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis6
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to-Plane, Unipolar Self-Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge6
IEEE/ASTM SI 10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System5
2.3 AMS Standard:
AMS 2771 Heat Treatment of Aluminum Alloy Castings 9
2.4 American National Standards:
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.01 on
Aluminum Alloy Ingots and Castings.
Current edition approved Apr. 10, 2003. Published September 2003. Originally
approved in 1918. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as B 26/B 26M – 02.
2 For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see related Specifi-
cation SB-26/SB-26M in Section II of that Code.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.09.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
7 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
8 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
9 Available from Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation System for Alumi-
num10
H35.1M Alloy and Temper Designation System for Alumi-
num [Metric]10
2.5 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage11
MIL-STD-276 Impregnation of Porous Nonferrous Metal
Castings11
NAVSEA Technical Publication S9074-AR-GIB-010/27811
2.6 Federal Standard:
FED. STD. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agen-
cies)11
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Refer to Terminology B 881 for definitions
of product terms used in this specification.
3.2 sand casting—a metal object produced by pouring
molten metal into a sand mold and allowing it to solidify.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information (1.4 and 1.5):
4.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, year, and revision letter, if applicable),
NOTE 1—For inch-pound application, specify Specification B 26 and
for metric application specify Specification B 26M. Do not mix units.
4.1.2 The quantity in either pieces or pounds [kilograms].
4.1.3 Alloy (Section 7 and Table 1),
4.1.4 Temper (Section 12 and Table 2),
4.1.5 Applicable drawing or part number,
4.2 Additionally, orders for material to this specification
shall include the following information when required by the
purchaser:
4.2.1 Whether chemical analysis and tensile property re-
ports are required (Table 1 and Table 2),
4.2.2 Whether castings or test bars, or both, may be artifi-
cially aged for Alloys 705.0-T5, 707.0-T5, 712.0-T5 and
713.0-T5 (12.2) and whether yield strength tests are required
for these alloys,
4.2.3 Whether test specimens cut from castings are required
in addition to or instead of separately cast specimens (Sections
12 and 15),
4.2.4 Whether repairs are permissible (18.1),
10 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02, in the Related Material section
(gray pages).
11 Available from Standardization Documents, Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Limits
NOTE 1—When single units are shown, these indicate the maximum amounts permitted.
NOTE 2—Analysis shall be made for the elements for which limits are shown in this table.
NOTE 3—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of determining conformance to these limits, an observed value or a
calculated value obtained from analysis shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit
in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
Alloy
Aluminum
Composition, (Values in Weight Percent) Others
ANSI UNS Silicon Iron Copper
Man-
ganese
Magne-
sium
Chromium Nickel Zinc Tin Titanium Each Total
201.0 A02010 remainder 0.10 0.15 4.0–5.2 0.20–0.50 0.15–0.55 ... ... ... ... 0.15–0.35 0.05A 0.10
204.0 A02040 remainder 0.20 0.35 4.2–5.0 0.10 0.15–0.35 ... 0.05 0.10 0.05 0.15–0.30 0.05 0.15
242.0 A02420 remainder 0.7 1.0 3.7–4.5 0.35 1.2–1.8 0.25 1.7–2.3 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
A242.0 A12420 remainder 0.6 0.8 3.7–4.5 0.10 1.2–1.7 0.15–0.251.8–2.3 0.10 ... 0.07–0.20 0.05 0.15
295.0 A02950 remainder 0.7–1.5 1.0 4.0–5.0 0.35 0.03 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
319.0 A03190 remainder 5.5–6.5 1.0 3.0–4.0 0.50 0.10 ... 0.35 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
328.0 A03280 remainder 7.5–8.5 1.0 1.0–2.0 0.20–0.6 0.20–0.6 0.35 0.25 1.5 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
355.0 A03550 remainder 4.5–5.5 0.6B 1.0–1.5 0.50B 0.40–0.6 0.25 ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
C355.0 A33550 remainder 4.5–5.5 0.20 1.0–1.5 0.10 0.40–0.6 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
356.0 A03560 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.6B 0.25 0.35B 0.20–0.45 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
A356.0 A13560 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.25–0.45 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
443.0 A04430 remainder 4.5–6.0 0.8 0.6 0.50 0.05 0.25 ... 0.50 ... 0.25 ... 0.35
B443.0 A24430 remainder 4.5–6.0 0.8 0.15 0.35 0.05 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
512.0 A05120 remainder 1.4–2.2 0.6 0.35 0.8 3.5–4.5 0.25 ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
514.0 A05140 remainder 0.35 0.50 0.15 0.35 3.5–4.5 ... ... 0.15 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
520.0 A05200 remainder 0.25 0.30 0.25 0.15 9.5–10.6 ... ... 0.15 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
535.0 A05350 remainder 0.15 0.15 0.05 0.10–0.25 6.2–7.5 ... ... ... ... 0.10–0.25 0.05C 0.15
705.0 A07050 remainder 0.20 0.8 0.20 0.40–0.6 1.4–1.8 0.20–0.40 ... 2.7–3.3 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
707.0 A07070 remainder 0.20 0.8 0.20 0.40–0.6 1.8–2.4 0.20–0.40 ... 4.0–4.5 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
710.0D A07100 remainder 0.15 0.50 0.35–0.65 0.05 0.6–0.8 ... ... 6.0–7.0 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
712.0D A07120 remainder 0.30 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.50–0.65 0.40–0.6 ... 5.0–6.5 ... 0.15–0.25 0.05 0.20
713.0 A07130 remainder 0.25 1.1 0.40–1.0 0.6 0.20–0.50 0.35 0.15 7.0–8.0 ... 0.25 0.10 0.25
771.0 A07710 remainder 0.15 0.15 0.10 0.10 0.8–1.0 0.06–0.20 ... 6.5–7.5 ... 0.10–0.20 0.05 0.15
850.0 A08500 remainder 0.7 0.7 0.7–1.3 0.10 0.10 ... 0.7–1.3 ... 5.5–7.0 0.20 ... 0.30
851.0D A08510 remainder 2.0–3.0 0.7 0.7–1.3 0.10 0.10 ... 0.30–0.7 ... 5.5–7.0 0.20 ... 0.30
852.0D A08520 remainder 0.40 0.7 1.7–2.3 0.10 0.6–0.9 ... 0.9–1.5 ... 5.5–7.0 0.20 ... 0.30
A Contains silver 0.40–1.0 %.
B If iron exceeds 0.45 %, manganese content shall not be less than one half of the iron content.
C Contains beryllium 0.003–0.007 %, boron 0.005 % max.
D 710.0 formerly A712.0, 712.0 formerly D712.0, 851.0 formerly A850.0, 852.0 formerly B850.0.
B 26/B 26M – 03
2
4.2.5 Whether inspection is required at the producer’s
works (Section 20),
4.2.6 Whether certification is required (23.1),
4.2.7 Whether surface requirements shall be checked
against observational standards where such standards are
established (21.1),
4.2.8 Whether liquid penetrant inspection is required (21.2),
4.2.9 Whether radiographic inspection is required (21.3),
and
4.2.10 Whether foundry control is required (Section 11).
4.2.11 Whether Practice B 660 applies and, if so, the levels
of preservation, packaging and packing required (25.4).
5. Quality Assurance
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the producer shall be responsible for the performance of
all inspections and test requirements specified herein. Unless
disapproved by the purchaser, the producer may use his own or
any other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspec-
tion and test requirements specified herein. The purchaser shall
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed
necessary to confirm that the material conforms to prescribed
requirements.
TABLE 2 Tensile RequirementsA (Inch-Pound Units)
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded to the
nearest 0.1 ksi and each value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 % , both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
Alloy
TemperB
Tensile Strength,
min, ksi
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi
Elongation in
2 in. or 4 x
diameter, min, %
Typical Brinell Hard-
ness,C 500 kgf, 10
mmANSID UNS
201.0 A02010 T7 60.0 50.0 3.0 ...
204.0 A02040 T4 45.0 28.0 6.0 ...
242.0 A02420 OE 23.0 F F 70
T61 32.0 20.0 F 105
A242.0 A12420 T75 29.0 F 1.0 75
295.0 A02950 T4 29.0 13.0 6.0 60
T6 32.0 20.0 3.0 75
T62 36.0 28.0 F 95
T7 29.0 16.0 3.0 70
319.0 A03190 F
T5
T6
23.0
25.0
31.0
13.0
F
20.0
1.5
F
1.5
70
80
80
328.0 A03280 F
T6
25.0
34.0
14.0
21.0
1.0
1.0
60
80
355.0 A03550 T6
T51
T71
32.0
25.0
30.0
20.0
18.0
22.0
2.0
F
F
80
65
75
C355.0 A33550 T6 36.0 25.0 2.5 ...
356.0 A03560 F 19.0 9.5 2.0 55
T6 30.0 20.0 3.0 70
T7 31.0 F F 75
T51 23.0 16.0 F 60
T71 25.0 18.0 3.0 60
A356.0 A13560 T6
T61
34.0
35.0
24.0
26.0
3.5
1.0
80
...
443.0 A04430 F 17.0 7.0 3.0 40
B443.0
512.0
A24430
A05120
F
F
17.0
17.0
6.0
10.0
3.0
...
40
50
514.0 A05140 F 22.0 9.0 6.0 50
520.0 A05200 T4 42.0 22.0 12.0 75
535.0 A05350 F 35.0 18.0 9.0 70
705.0 A07050 T5 30.0 17.0G 5.0 65
707.0 A07070 T7 37.0 30.0G 1.0 80
710.0H A07100 T5 32.0 20.0 2.0 75
712.0H A07120 T5 34.0 25.0G 4.0 75
713.0 A07130 T5 32.0 22.0 3.0 75
771.0 A07710 T5 42.0 38.0 1.5 100
T51 32.0 27.0 3.0 85
T52 36.0 30.0 1.5 85
T6 42.0 35.0 5.0 90
T71 48.0 45.0 2.0 120
850.0 A08500 T5 16.0 F 5.0 45
851.0H A08510 T5 17.0 F 3.0 45
852.0H A08520 T5 24.0 18.0 F 60
A If agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, other mechanical properties may be obtained by other heat treatments such as annealing, aging, or stress
relieving.
B Refer to ANSI H35.1 and/or H35.1M for description of tempers.
C For information only, not required for acceptance.
D ASTM alloy designations are recorded in Practice B 275.
E Formerly designated as 222.0-T2 and 242.0-T21.
F Not required.
G Yield strength to be determined only when specified in the contract or purchase order.
H 710.0 formerly A712.0, 712.0 formerly D712.0, 851.0 formerly A850.0, 852.0 formerly B850.0.
B 26/B 26M – 03
3
6. Manufacture
6.1 The responsibility of furnishing castings that can be laid
out and machined to the finished dimensions within the
permissible variations specified, as shown on the blueprints or
drawings, shall rest with the producer, except where pattern
equipment is furnished by the purchaser.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The castings shall conform to the chemical composition
limits prescribed in Table 1. Conformance shall be determined
by the producer by analyzing samples taken at the time the
castings are poured, or samples taken from castings or tension
test specimens representative of castings. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the material during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
8. Sampling
8.1 A sample for determining of chemical composition shall
be taken to represent the following:
8.1.1 Not more than 2000 lb [1000 kg] of clean castings
(gates and risers removed) or a single casting poured from one
furnace.
8.1.2 Castings poured continuously from one furnace for
not more than 8 consecutive hours.
8.2 Samples for determination of chemical composition
shall be taken in accordance with one of the following
methods:
8.2.1 Samples for Chemical Analysis— Samples for chemi-
cal analysis shall be in accordance with Practice E 88 except
that the weight of a prepared sample shall be not less than 75
g.
8.2.2 Samples for Spectrochemical and Other Methods of
Analysis—Sampling for spectrochemical analysis shall be in
accordance with Practices E 716. Samples for other methods of
analysis shall be suitable for the form of material being
analyzed and the type of analytical methods used.
9. Methods for Determination of Chemical Composition
9.1 The determination of chemical composition shall be
made in accordance with suitable chemical (Test Methods
E 34) or spectrochemical (Test Methods E 607 and E 1251)
methods. Other methods may be used only when no published
ASTM method is available. In case of dispute, the method of
analysis shall be agreed upon by the producer and the pur-
chaser.
10. Material Requirements—Castings Produced for
Governmental and MilitaryAgencies
10.1 Unless otherwise specified, only aluminum alloy con-
forming to the requirements of Specification B 179 or produc-
er’s foundry scrap (identified as being made from alloy
conforming to Specification B 179) shall be used in the
remelting furnace from which molten metal is taken for
pouring directly into castings. Additions of small amounts of
modifiers and grain refining elements or alloys are permitted.
10.1.1 Pure materials, recycled materials, and master alloys
may be used to make alloys conforming to this specification,
provided chemical analysis can be taken and adjusted to
conform to Table 1 prior to pouring any castings.
11. Foundry Control—Castings Produced for
Governmental and/or Military Agencies
11.1 When specified, castings shall be produced under
foundry control approved by the purchaser. Foundry control
shall consist of examination of castings by radiographic or
other approved methods for determining internal discontinui-
ties until the gating, pouring, and other foundry practices have
been established to produce castings meeting the quality
standards furnished by the purchaser or agreed upon between
the purchaser and the producer. When foundry practices have
been so established, the production method shall not be
significantly changed without demonstrating to the satisfaction
of the purchaser that the change does not adversely affect the
quality of the castings. Minor changes in pouring temperature
of 650°F [628°C] from the established nominal temperature
are permissible.
12. Tensile Properties
12.1 The separately cast test specimens representing the
castings shall meet the mechanical properties prescribed in
Table 2.
12.2 Although Alloys 705.0, 707.0, 712.0, and 713.0 are
most frequently used in the naturally aged condition, by
agreement between the producer and the purchaser, the cast-
ings may be artificially aged to the T5 temper. The producer
and the purchaser may also agree to base the acceptance of
castings on artificially aged test bars. The conditions of
artificial aging shown in Practice B 917/B 917M shall be
employed unless other conditions are accepted by mutual
consent.
12.3 When specified, the tensile strength, yield strength, and
elongation values of specimens cut from castings shall be not
less than 75 % of the tensile and yield strength values and not
less than 25 % of the elongation values specified in Table 2
[Table 3]. The measurement of the elongation is not required
for test specimens cut from castings if 25 % of the specified
minimum elongation value published in Table 2 [Table 3] is 0.5
% or less. If grade D quality castings as described in Table 4
are specified, no tensile tests shall be specified nor tensile
requirements be met on specimens cut from castings.
13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
13.1 The finished castings shall be uniform in composition
and free of blowholes, cracks, shrinks, and other discontinui-
ties except as designated and agreed upon as acceptable by the
purchaser.
14. Number of Tests and Retests
14.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the purchaser
and producer, a minimum of two tension test specimens shall
be separately cast and tested to represent the following:
14.1.1 Not more than 4000 lb [2000 kg] of clean castings
(gates and risers removed) or a single casting poured from one
furnace.
14.1.2 The castings poured continuously from one furnace
in not more than eight consecutive hours.
B 26/B 26M – 03
4
TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements (SI Units)—[Metric]A
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded to the
nearest 1 MPa and each value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 %, both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
Alloy
TemperB
Tensile Strength,
min, MPaC
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min, MPaC
Elongation in
53 diameter,
min %
Typical Brinell
Hardness,D
500 kgf, 10 mmANSIE UNS
201.0 A02010 T7 415 345 3.0 ...
204.0 A02040 T4 310 195 6.0 ...
242.0 A02420 OF 160 G G 70
T61 220 140 G 105
A242.0 A12420 T75 200 G 1.0 75
295.0 A02950 T4 200 90 6.0 60
T6 220 140 3.0 75
T62 250 195 G 95
T7 200 110 3.0 70
319.0 A03190 F 160 90 1.5 70
T5 170 G G 80
T6 215 140 1.5 80
328.0 A03280 F 170 95 1.0 60
T6 235 145 1.0 80
355.0 A03550 T6 220 140 2.0 80
T51 170 125 G 65
T71 205 150 G 75
C355.0 A33550 T6 250 170 2.5 ...
356.0 A03560 F 130 65 2.0 55
T6 205 140 3.0 70
T7 215 G G 75
T51 160 110 G 60
T71 170 125 3.0 60
A356.0 A13560 T6 235 165 3.5 80
T61 245 180 1.0 ...
443.0 A04430 F 115 50 3.0 40
B443.0 A24430 F 115 40 3.0 40
512.0 A05120 F 115 70 ... 50
514.0 A05140 F 150 60 6.0 50
520.0 A05200 T4 290 150 12.0 75
535.0 A05350 F 240 125 9.0 70
705.0 A07050 T5 205 115H 5.0 65
707.0 A07070 T7 255 205H 1.0 80
710.0I A07100 T5 220 140 2.0 75
712.0I A07120 T5 235 170H 4.0 75
713.0 A07130 T5 220 150 3.0 75
771.0 A07710 T5 290 260 1.5 100
T51 220 185 3.0 85
T52 250 205 1.5 85
T6 290 240 5.0 90
T71 330 310 2.0 120
850.0 A08500 T5 110 G 5.0 45
851.0I A08510 T5 115 G 3.0 45
852.0I A08520 T5 165 125 G 60
A If agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, other mechanical properties may be obtained by other heat treatments such as annealing, aging, or stress
relieving.
B Temper designations:
F As fabricated.
O Annealed.
T1 Cooled from an elevated temperature shaping process and naturally aged to a substantially stable condition.
T4 Solution heat-treated and naturally aged to a substantially stable condition.
T5 Cooled from an elevated temperature shaping process and then artificially aged.
T6 Solution heat-treated and then artificially aged.
T7 Solution heat-treated and stabilized.
Additional digits, the first of which shall not be zero, may be added to designation T1 through T10 to indicate a variation in treatment that significantly alters the
characteristics of the product.
C For explanation of the SI unit “MPa” see Appendix X2.
D For information only, not required for acceptance.
E ASTM alloy designations are recorded in Practice B 275.
F Formerly designated as 222.0-T2 and 242.0-T21.
G Not required.
H Yield strength to be determined only when specified in the contract or purchase order.
I 710.0 formerly A712.0, 712.0 formerly D712.0, 851.0 formerly A850.0, 852.0 formerly B850.0.
B 26/B 26M – 03
5
14.2 When tensile properties from castings are to be deter-
mined, one per melt-heat combination shall be tested unless
otherwise shown on the drawing or specified in the purchase
order.
14.3 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
flaws, it may be discarded; in which case the purchaser and the
producer shall agree upon the selection of another specimen in
its stead.
14.4 If the results of the tension tests do not conform to the
requirements prescribed in Table 2 [Table 3]; the test bars
representative of the castings may be retested in accordance
with the replacement tests and retest provisions of Test
Methods B 557 and B 557M, and the results of retests shall
conform to the requirements as to mechanical properties
specified in Table 2 [Table 3].
15. Specimen Preparation
15.1 The tension test specimens shall be cast to size in sand
without chills in accordance with the dimensions shown in Fig.
1 [Fig. 2]. They shall not be machined prior to test except to
adapt the grip ends in such a manner as to ensure axial loading.
15.2 The recommended method for casting tension test
specimens is shown in Fig. 1 [Fig. 2].
15.3 When properties of castings are to be determined,
tension test specimens shall be cut from the locations desig-
nated on the drawing, unless otherwise negotiated. If no
locations are designated, one or more specimens shall be taken
to include locations having significant variation in casting
thickness, except that specimens shall not be taken from areas
directly under risers. The tension test specimens shall be the
standard 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimens shown in
Fig. 8 of Test Methods B 557 and B 557M or a round specimen
of smallersize proportional to the standard specimen. In no
case shall the dimensions of the smallest specimen be less than
the following:
TABLE 4 Discontinuity-Level Requirements for Aluminum Sand Castings (Reference Radiographs E 155)
Discontinuity Radiograph
Section Thickness in. [mm]
Grade AA Grade B Grade C Grade D
1⁄4 [6.4] 3⁄4 [19.0] 1⁄4 [6.4] 3⁄4 [19.0] 1⁄4 [6.4] 3⁄4 [19.0] 1⁄4 [6.4] 3⁄4 [19.0]
Gas holes 1.1 none 1 1 2 2 5 5
Gas porosity (round) 1.21 none 1 1 3 3 7 7
Gas porosity (elongated) 1.22 none 1 1 3 4 5 5
Shrinkage cavity 2.1 none 1 B 2 B 3 B
Shrinkage porosity or sponge 2.2 none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Foreign material (less dense material) 3.11 none 1 1 2 2 4 4
Foreign material (more dense material) 3.12 none 1 1 2 1 4 3
Segregation 3.2 none none none none
Cracks ... none none none none
Cold shuts ... none none none none
Surface irregularity ... ... not to exceed drawing tolerance
Core shift ... ... not to exceed drawing tolerance
A Caution should be exercised in requesting Grade A.
B Not available.
NOTE 1—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
FIG. 1 Tension Test Specimen Casting
B 26/B 26M – 03
6
in. mm
Diameter of reduced section 0.250 6.00
Length of reduced section 11⁄4 36
Gage length 1.000 30.00
Radius of fillet 3⁄16 6
Diameter of end section 3⁄8 9
Overall length:
With shouldered ends 23⁄8 60
With threaded ends 3 75
With plain cylindrical ends 4 100
When necessary, a rectangular specimen may be used
proportional to that shown for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] wide
specimen in Fig. 6 of Test Methods B 557 and B 557M, but in
no case shall its dimensions be less than the following:
in. mm
Width of reduced section 1⁄4 6.00
Length of reduced section 11⁄4 32
Radius of fillet 1⁄4 6
Overall length 4 100
Thickness 0.100 2.50
The specific elongation values shall not apply to tests of
rectangular specimens.
15.4 If the castings are to be heat treated and separately cast
specimens are to be used, the specimens representing such
castings shall be heat treated with the castings they represent.
If castings are to be heat treated and tests are to be obtained on
the castings, the test specimens shall be taken from the castings
after heat treatment.
16. Test Methods
16.1 The determination of chemical composition shall be
made in accordance with suitable chemical (Test Methods
E 34), or spectrochemical (Test Methods E 607 and E 1251),
methods. Other methods may be used only when no published
ASTM method is available. In case of dispute, the methods of
analysis shall be agreed upon between the producer and
purchaser.
16.2 The tensile properties shall be determined in accor-
dance with Test Methods B 557 and B 557M.
17. Heat Treatment
17.1 Heat treatment of castings shall be performed in
accordance with Practice B 917/B 917M or AMS 2771.
18. Repair of Castings
18.1 Castings may be repaired only by processes approved
and agreed upon between the producer and purchaser, that is,
welding, impregnation, peening, blending, soldering, and so
forth. Limitations on the extent and frequency of such repairs,
and methods of inspection of repaired areas should also be
agreed upon.
19. Repairing of Castings—Produced for Governmental
and Military Agencies
19.1 Welding:
19.1.1 When welding is permitted, it shall be done by
methods suitable for the particular alloy. Welding methods
shall be in accordance with such specifications as are refer-
enced on the applicable drawings, or as are required by the
contract or order.
19.1.2 All welding shall be done by qualified welders
approved by the purchaser.
19.1.3 When castings are to be supplied in the heat-treated
condition, they shall be heat treated to the required temper after
welding, except that small arc welds may be performed without
subsequent heat treatment upon approval of the purchaser.
19.1.4 Unless otherwise specified, castings that have been
repaired by welding shall have the welded areas examined
radiographically after all reworking and heat treatment have
been completed.
19.1.5 All welds shall be free of cracks, excess gas, poros-
ity, lack of fusion and meet the same quality requirements as
the parent material.
19.1.6 Welded castings shall be marked with a symbol of
three concentric circles with a letter or number designating the
welder adjacent to the symbol. The outer circle of the symbol
shall be not larger than 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] in outside diameter. All
welded areas shall be encircled with a ring of white paint prior
to submission for final inspection.
19.1.7 Naval Shipboard Applications—Repair welding of
castings used in Naval shipboard pressure vessels, piping
systems and machinery shall be performed in accordance with
requirements for repair of castings specified in NAVSEA
Technical Publication S9074-AR-GIB-010/278.
19.2 Impregnation—When impregnation is permitted, it
shall be to correct general seepage leaks only and shall not be
used to correct poor foundry technique or significant porosity.
It shall be accomplished in accordance with MIL-STD-276.
Unless otherwise authorized by the purchaser, castings which
have been impregnated shall be marked “IMP.”
FIG. 2 Tension Test Specimen Casting [Metric]
B 26/B 26M – 03
7
19.3 Peening—When peening is permitted, it shall be to
correct localized minor seepage leaks and small surface imper-
fections only, or to disclose subsurface voids for purpose of
inspection. Peening will not be permitted to repair cracks, cold
shuts, shrinks, misruns, defects due to careless handling, or
other similar major defects. Peening may be accomplished
either hot or cold and shall be performed by methods which are
acceptable to the purchaser. Peened castings shall be marked
with Maltese cross approximately 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] high.
19.4 Blending—Blending with suitable grinders or other
tools will be permitted for the removal of surface imperfections
only, and shall not result in dimensions outside the tolerances
shown on the applicable drawing.
20. Source Inspection
20.1 If the purchaser elects to make an inspection of the
casting at the producer’s works, it shall be so stated in the
contract or order.
20.2 If the purchaser elects to have inspection made at the
producer’s works, the producer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests and
inspection shall be so conducted as not to interfere unneces-
sarily with the operation of the works.
21. Foundry Inspection
21.1 Requirements such as surface finish, parting line pro-
jections, snagging projections where gates and risers were
removed, and so forth, may be checked visually. It is advisable
to have agreed-upon observational standards representing both
acceptable and unacceptable material.
21.2 Liquid Penetrant Inspection:
21.2.1 When specified, liquid penetrant inspection shall be
in accordance with Test Method E 165, and the required
sensitivity shall be specified.
21.2.2 Acceptance standards for discontinuities shall be
agreed upon, including size and frequency per unit area and
location.
21.3 Radiographic Inspection:
21.3.1 When specified, radiographic inspection shall be in
accordance with Guide E 94 and Reference Radiographs
E 155.
21.3.2 Radiographic acceptance shall be in accordance with
requirements selected from Table 4. Any modifications of this
table and the frequency per unit area and location should also
be agreed upon.
21.3.3 The number, film size, and orientation of radiographs
and the number of castings radiographically inspected shall be
agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.
22. Rejection and Rehearing
22.1 Castings that show unacceptable defects revealed by
operations subsequent to acceptance and within an agreed time
may be rejected, and shall be replaced by the producer.
22.2 In the case of dissatisfaction regarding rejections based
on chemical composition and mechanical properties specified
in Section 7 and 12, respectively, the producer may make claim
for rehearing as the basis of arbitration within a reasonable
time after receiptby the producer of the rejection notification.
23. Certification
23.1 The producer shall, on request, furnish to the purchaser
a certificate stating that each lot has been sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this specification, and has met the
requirements.
24. Identification and Repair Marking—Castings
Produced for Government and Military Agencies
24.1 Identification—Unless otherwise specified, each cast-
ing shall be marked with the applicable drawing or part
number. The marking shall consist of raised Arabic numerals,
and when applicable capital letters, cast integral. The location
of the identification marking shall be as specified on the
applicable drawing. When the location is not specified on the
drawing, the drawing/part number shall be placed in a location
mutually agreeable to the purchaser and producer.
24.1.1 Lot Identification—When practicable, each casting
shall also be marked with the melt of inspection lot number.
24.2 Lot—A lot shall consist of all of the cleaned castings
poured from the same heat or melt when subsequent heat
treatment is not required.
24.2.1 When the castings consist of alloys which require
heat treatment, the lot shall consist of all castings from the
same melt or heat which have been heat treated in the same
furnace charge, or if heat treated in a continuous furnace, all
castings from the same melt or heat that are discharged from
the furnace during a 4-h period.
24.3 Repair Markings—All identification markings indicat-
ing repairs as specified in 19.1.6, 19.2, and 19.3, shall be made
with a waterproof marking fluid.
25. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
25.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packaging and gross weight of individual containers
shall be left to the discretion of the producer unless otherwise
agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers shall be so
selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical equip-
ment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each package or
container shall contain only one size, alloy, and temper of
material when packaged for shipment unless otherwise agreed
upon.
25.2 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, drawing number, quantity, specifica-
tion number, alloy and temper, gross and net weights, and the
name of the producer.
25.3 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
25.4 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged and packed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Practices B 660. The applicable
levels shall be as specified in the contract or order. Marking for
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
No. 123 or Practice D 3951 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-
129 for military agencies.
26. Keywords
26.1 aluminum; sand casting
B 26/B 26M – 03
8
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. BASIS FOR INCLUSION OF PROPERTY LIMITS
A1.1 Limits are established at a level at which a statistical
evaluation of the data indicates that 99 % of the population
obtained from all standard material meets the limit with 95 %
confidence. For the products described, mechanical property
limits for the respective size ranges are based on the analyses
of at least 100 data from standard production material with no
more than ten data from a given lot. All tests are performed in
accordance with the appropriate ASTM test methods. For
informational purposes, refer to “Statistical Aspects of Me-
chanical Property Assurance” in the Related Material section of
the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
A2. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR INCLUSION OF NEW ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOYS
IN THIS SPECIFICATION
A2.1 Prior to acceptance for inclusion in this specification,
the composition of wrought or cast aluminum or aluminum
alloy shall be registered in accordance with ANSI H35.1 or
H35.1(M). The Aluminum Association12 holds the Secretariat
of ANSI H35 Committee and administers the criteria and
procedures for registration.
A2.2 If it is documented that the Aluminum Association
could not or would not register a given composition, an
alternative procedure and the criteria for acceptance shall be as
follows:
A2.2.1 The designation submitted for inclusion does not
utilize the same designation system as described in ANSI
H35.1 or H35.1(M). A designation not in conflict with other
designation systems or a trade name is acceptable.
A2.2.2 The aluminum or aluminum alloy has been offered
for sale in commercial quantities within the prior twelve
months to at least three identifiable users.
A2.2.3 The complete chemical composition limits are sub-
mitted.
A2.2.4 The composition is, in the judgement of the respon-
sible subcommittee, significantly different from that of any
other aluminum or aluminum alloy already in the specification.
A2.2.5 For codification purposes, an alloying element is any
element intentionally added for any purpose other than grain
refinement and for which minimum and maximum limits are
specified. Unalloyed aluminum contains a minimum of
99.00 % aluminum.
A2.2.6 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed to the following decimal places:
Less than 0.001 % 0.000X
0.001 to but less than 0.01 % 0.00X
0.01 to but less than 0.10 %
Unalloyed aluminum made by a refining process 0.0XX
Alloys and unalloyed aluminum not made by a refining
process 0.0X
0.10 through 0.55 % 0.XX
(It is customary to express limits of 0.30 through 0.55 %
as 0.X0 or 0.X5.)
Over 0.55 % 0.X, X.X, etc.
(except that combined Si + Fe limits for 99.00 % min
imum aluminum must be expressed as 0.XX or
1.XX)
A2.2.7 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed in the following sequence: Silicon; Iron; Copper;
Manganese; Magnesium; Chromium; Nickel; Zinc (Note
A2.1); Titanium; Other Elements, Each; Other Elements, Total;
Aluminum (Note A2.2).
NOTE A2.1—Additional specified elements having limits are inserted in
alphabetical order of their chemical symbols between zinc and titanium, or
are specified in footnotes.
NOTE A2.2—Aluminum is specified as minimum for unalloyed alumi-
num and as a remainder for aluminum alloys.12 The Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006.
B 26/B 26M – 03
9
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. ALLOY PROPERTIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
X1.1 The data in Table X1.1 are approximate and are
supplied for general information only.
X2. SI UNITS
X2.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI) (IEEE/
ASTM SI 10). The derived SI unit for force is the newton (N),
which is defined as that force which when applied to a body
having a mass of one kilogram gives it an acceleration of one
metre per second squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit
for pressure or stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2),
which has been named the pascal (Pa) by the General Confer-
ence on Weights and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa,
the metric equivalents are expressed as megapascal (MPa),
which is the same as MN/m2 and N/mm2.
B 26/B 26M – 03
10
TA
B
L
E
X
1.
1
P
ro
p
er
ti
es
an
d
C
h
ar
ac
te
ri
st
ic
s
N
O
T
E
1—
1
in
di
ca
te
s
be
st
of
gr
ou
p,
5
in
di
ca
te
s
po
or
es
t
of
gr
ou
p.
A
llo
y
P
at
te
rn
S
hr
in
ka
ge
A
llo
w
an
ce
,A
in
./f
t
[m
m
/m
]
A
pp
ro
xi
m
at
e
M
el
tin
g
R
an
ge
,B
°F
[°
C
]
R
es
is
t-
an
ce
to
H
ot
C
ra
ck
-
in
gC
P
re
ss
ur
e
Ti
gh
tn
es
s
F
lu
id
-
ity
D
S
ol
id
i-
fic
at
io
n
S
hr
in
k-
ag
e
Te
nd
-
en
cy
E
N
or
m
al
ly
H
ea
t
Tr
ea
te
d
R
es
is
t-
an
ce
to
C
or
ro
-
si
on
F
M
ac
hi
n-
in
gG
P
ol
is
h-
in
gH
E
le
ct
ro
-
pl
at
in
gI
A
no
di
z-
in
g
(A
p-
pe
ar
-
an
ce
)J
C
he
m
ic
al
O
xi
de
C
oa
tin
g
(P
ro
te
c-
tio
n)
K
S
tr
en
gt
h
at
E
le-
va
te
d
Te
m
pe
ra
-
tu
re
L
S
ui
ta
bi
l-
ity
fo
r
W
el
d-
in
gM
S
ui
ta
bi
l-
ity
fo
r
B
ra
zi
ng
N
A
N
S
IO
U
N
S
20
1.
0
A
02
01
0
[1
3]
10
60
–1
20
0
[5
71
–6
49
]
4
3
3
4
ye
s
4
1
1
1
2
2
1
4
no
20
4.
0
A
02
04
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
98
5–
12
00
[5
29
–6
49
]
4
3
3
4
ye
s
4
1
2
1
3
4
1
4
no
24
2.
0
A
02
42
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
99
0–
11
75
[5
32
–6
35
]
4
3
3
4
ye
s
4
2
2
1
3
4
1
4
no
29
5.
0
A
02
95
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
97
0–
11
90
[5
21
–6
43
]
4
4
3
3
ye
s
3
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
no
31
9.
0
A
03
19
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
95
0–
11
25
[5
10
–6
07
]
2
2
2
2
ye
s
3
3
4
2
4
3
3
2
no
32
8.
0
A
03
28
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
96
0–
11
35
[5
16
–6
13
]
1
1
1
1
ye
s
3
4
5
2
4
2
2
2
no
35
5.
0
A
03
55
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
15
–1
15
0
[5
46
–6
21
]
1
1
1
1
ye
s
3
3
3
1
4
2
2
2
no
C
35
5.
0
A
33
55
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
15
–1
15
0
[5
46
–6
21
]
1
1
1
1
ye
s
3
3
3
1
4
2
2
2
no
35
6.
0
A
03
56
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
35
–1
13
5
[5
57
–6
13
]
1
1
1
1
ye
s
2
4
5
2
4
2
3
2
no
A
35
6.
0
A
13
56
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
35
–1
13
5
[5
57
–6
13
]
1
1
1
1
ye
s
2
4
5
2
4
2
3
2
no
44
3.
0
A
04
43
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
65
–1
17
0
[5
74
–6
32
]
1
1
1
1
no
3
5
5
2
5
2
4
1
ltd
B
44
3.
0
A
24
43
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
65
–1
17
0
[5
74
–6
32
]
1
1
1
1
no
2
5
5
2
5
2
4
1
ltd
51
4.
0
A
05
14
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
11
10
–1
18
5
[5
99
–6
40
]
4
5
5
5
no
1
1
1
5
1
1
2
4
no
52
0.
0
A
05
20
0
1
⁄10
[8
]
84
0–
11
20
[4
49
–6
04
]
2
5
4
5
ye
s
1
1
1
4
1
1
P
5
no
53
5.
0
A
05
35
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
10
20
–1
16
5
[5
49
–6
29
]
3
5
5
5
no
1
1
1
5
1
1
3
4
no
70
5.
0
A
07
05
0
3
⁄16
[1
6]
11
05
–1
18
0
[5
96
–6
38
]
5
3
4
4
ag
ed
2
1
1
3
2
2
5
4
ye
s
on
ly
70
7.
0
71
0.
0Q
A
07
07
0
A
07
10
0
3
⁄16
[1
6]
3
⁄16
[1
6]
10
85
–1
16
5
[5
85
–6
29
]
11
05
–1
19
5
[5
96
–6
46
]
5 5
3 3
4 4
4 4
ye
s
ag
ed
on
ly
2 2
1 1
1 1
3 2
2 2
2 3
5 5
4 4
ye
s
ye
s
71
2.
0Q
A
07
12
0
3
⁄16
[1
6]
11
10
–1
18
5
[5
99
–6
41
]
5
3
4
4
ag
ed
on
ly
2
1
1
2
2
3
5
4
ye
s
71
3.
0
A
07
13
0
3
⁄16
[1
6]
11
00
–1
18
5
[5
93
–6
41
]
5
3
4
4
ag
ed
on
ly
2
1
1
2
2
3
5
4
ye
s
77
1.
0
85
0.
0
A
07
71
0
A
08
50
0
3
⁄16
[1
6]
5
⁄32
[1
3]
11
20
–1
19
0
[6
04
–6
43
]
43
5–
12
00
[2
24
–6
49
]
5 5
3 5
4 5
4 5
ye
s
ag
ed
on
ly
2 3
1 1
1 1
3 5
2 4
2 5
5 P
4 5
ye
s
no
85
1.
0Q
A
08
51
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
44
0–
11
65
[2
27
–6
29
]
4
4
5
4
ag
ed
on
ly
3
1
1
5
4
5
P
5
no
85
2.
0Q
A
08
52
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
40
0–
11
75
[2
04
–6
35
]
5
5
5
5
ag
ed
on
ly
3
1
1
5
4
5
P
5
no
A
A
llo
w
an
ce
s
fo
r
av
er
ag
e
ca
st
in
gs
.
S
hr
in
ka
ge
re
qu
ire
m
en
ts
w
ill
va
ry
w
ith
in
tr
ic
ac
y
of
de
si
gn
an
d
di
m
en
si
on
s.
B
Te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
of
so
lid
s
an
d
liq
ui
ds
ar
e
in
di
ca
te
d;
po
ur
in
g
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
w
ill
be
hi
gh
er
.
C
A
bi
lit
y
of
al
lo
y
to
w
ith
st
an
d
co
nt
ra
ct
io
n
st
re
ss
es
w
hi
le
co
ol
in
g
th
ro
ug
h
ho
t-
sh
or
t
or
br
itt
le
-t
em
pe
ra
tu
re
ra
ng
e.
D
A
bi
lit
y
of
liq
ui
d
al
lo
y
to
flo
w
re
ad
ily
in
m
ol
d
an
d
fil
lt
hi
n
se
ct
io
ns
.
E
D
ec
re
as
ed
in
vo
lu
m
e
ac
co
m
pa
ny
in
g
fr
ee
zi
ng
of
al
lo
y
an
d
m
ea
su
re
of
am
ou
nt
of
co
m
pe
ns
at
in
g
fe
ed
m
et
al
re
qu
ire
d
in
fo
rm
of
ris
er
s.
F
B
as
ed
on
al
lo
y
re
si
st
an
ce
in
st
an
da
rd
-t
yp
e
sa
lt-
sp
ra
y
te
st
.
G
C
om
po
si
te
ra
tin
g
ba
se
d
on
ea
se
of
cu
tti
ng
,
ch
ip
ch
ar
ac
te
ris
tic
s,
qu
al
ity
of
fin
is
h,
an
d
to
ol
lif
e.
R
at
in
gs
,
in
th
e
ca
se
of
he
at
-t
re
at
ab
le
al
lo
ys
,
ba
se
d
on
a
-T
6
te
m
pe
r.
O
th
er
te
m
pe
rs
,
pa
rt
ic
ul
ar
ly
th
e
an
ne
al
ed
te
m
pe
r,
m
ay
ha
ve
lo
w
er
ra
tin
g.
H
C
om
po
si
te
ra
tin
g
ba
se
d
on
ea
se
an
d
sp
ee
d
of
po
lis
hi
ng
an
d
qu
al
ity
of
fin
is
h
pr
ov
id
ed
by
ty
pi
ca
lp
ol
is
hi
ng
pr
oc
ed
ur
e.
I
A
bi
lit
y
of
ca
st
in
g
to
ta
ke
an
d
ho
ld
an
el
ec
tr
op
la
te
ap
pl
ie
d
by
pr
es
en
t
st
an
da
rd
m
et
ho
ds
.
J
R
at
ed
on
lig
ht
ne
ss
of
co
lo
r,
br
ig
ht
ne
ss
,
an
d
un
ifo
rm
ity
of
cl
ea
r
an
od
iz
ed
co
at
in
g
ap
pl
ie
d
in
su
lfu
ric
ac
id
el
ec
tr
ol
yt
e.
K
R
at
ed
on
co
m
bi
ne
d
re
si
st
an
ce
of
co
at
in
g
an
d
ba
se
al
lo
y
to
co
rr
os
io
n.
L
R
at
in
g
ba
se
d
on
te
ns
ile
an
d
yi
el
d
st
re
ng
th
s
at
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
up
to
50
0°
F
[2
60
°C
],
af
te
r
pr
ol
on
ge
d
he
at
in
g
at
te
st
in
g
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
.
M
B
as
ed
on
ab
ili
ty
of
m
at
er
ia
lt
o
be
fu
si
on
w
el
de
d
w
ith
fil
le
r
ro
d
of
sa
m
e
al
lo
y.
N
R
ef
er
s
to
su
ita
bi
lit
y
of
al
lo
y
to
w
ith
st
an
d
br
az
in
g
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
w
ith
ou
t
ex
ce
ss
iv
e
di
st
or
tio
n
or
m
el
tin
g.
O
A
S
T
M
al
lo
y
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
ar
e
re
co
rd
ed
in
P
ra
ct
ic
e
B
27
5.
P
N
ot
re
co
m
m
en
de
d
fo
r
se
rv
ic
e
at
el
ev
at
ed
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s.
Q
71
0.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
A
71
2.
0,
71
2.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
D
71
2.
0,
85
1.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
A
85
0.
0,
85
2.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
B
85
0.
0.
B 26/B 26M – 03
11
X3. INACTIVE ALLOYS
X3.1 Alloys listed as inactive by the Aluminum
Association—208.0 and 222.0. Listing the composition limits,
mechanical properties, and characteristics of the alloys is a
method of preserving this data should it be needed at some
future date.
TABLE X3.1 Chemical Composition Limits–Inactive Alloys
NOTE 1—All applicable notes and footnotes can be found in Table 1
Alloy
Aluminum
Composition, (Values in Weight Percent) Others
ANSI UNS Silicon Iron Copper
Man-
ganese
Magne-
sium
Chromium Nickel Zinc Tin Titanium Each Total
208.0 A02080 remainder 2.5-3.5 1.2 3.5-4.5 0.50 0.10 ... 0.35 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
222.0 A02220 remainder 2.0 1.5 9.2-10.7 0.50 0.15-0.35 ... 0.50 0.8 ... 0.25 ... 0.35
TABLE X3.2 Tensile Requirements (Inch-Pound Units)–Inactive Alloys
NOTE 1—All applicable notes and footnotes can be found in Table 2.
Alloy
Temper
Tensile Strength,
min, ksi
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi
Elongation in
2 in. or 4 x
diameter, min, %
Typical Brinell Hard-
ness, 500 kgf, 10
mmANSI UNS
208.0 A02080 F 19.0 (131) 120 (83) 1.5 55
222.0 A02220 O 23.0 (159) 80
T6 30.0 (207) 115
B 26/B 26M – 03
12
TA
B
L
E
X
3.
3
P
ro
p
er
ti
es
an
d
C
h
ar
ac
te
ri
st
ic
s–
In
ac
ti
ve
A
llo
ys
N
O
T
E
1—
1
in
di
ca
te
s
be
st
of
gr
ou
p,
5
in
di
ca
te
s
po
or
es
t
of
gr
ou
p.
N
O
T
E
2—
A
ll
ap
pl
ic
ab
le
no
te
s
an
d
fo
ot
no
te
s
ca
n
be
fo
un
d
in
Ta
bl
e
X
1.
1.
A
llo
y
P
at
te
rn
S
hr
in
ka
ge
A
llo
w
an
ce
,A
in
./f
t
[m
m
/m
]
A
pp
ro
xi
m
at
e
M
el
tin
g
R
an
ge
,B
°F
[°
C
]
R
es
is
t-
an
ce
to
H
ot
C
ra
ck
-
in
gC
P
re
ss
ur
e
Ti
gh
tn
es
s
F
lu
id
-
ity
D
S
ol
id
i-
fic
at
io
n
S
hr
in
k-
ag
e
Te
nd
-
en
cy
E
N
or
m
al
ly
H
ea
t
Tr
ea
te
d
R
es
is
t-
an
ce
to
C
or
ro
-
si
on
F
M
ac
hi
n-
in
gG
P
ol
is
h-
in
gH
E
le
ct
ro
-
pl
at
in
gI
A
no
di
z-
in
g
(A
p-
pe
ar
-
an
ce
)J
C
he
m
ic
al
O
xi
de
C
oa
tin
g
(P
ro
te
c-
tio
n)
K
S
tr
en
gt
h
at
E
le
-
va
te
d
Te
m
pe
ra
-
tu
re
L
S
ui
ta
bi
l-
ity
fo
r
W
el
d-
in
gM
S
ui
ta
bi
l-
ity
fo
r
B
ra
zi
ng
N
A
N
S
IO
U
N
S
20
8.
0
A
02
08
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
97
0-
11
60
[5
21
-6
27
]
2
2
2
2
ye
s
4
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
no
22
2.
0
A
02
22
0
5
⁄32
[1
3]
96
5-
11
55
[5
18
-6
24
]
3
3
3
3
ye
s
4
1
2
1
3
4
1
4
no
B 26/B 26M – 03
13
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 26/B26M – 02) that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved April 10, 2003.)
(1) Added new section 2.3, AMS Standards, and added refer-
ence to AMS 2771.
(2) Section 12.2 revised to reference B 917/B 917M and AMS
2771.
(3) Section 17.1 revised to reference B 917/B 917M and AMS
2771.
(4) New sections 1.2 and 3.1 added.
(5) New Appendix X3 added.
(6) Alloys 208.0 and 222.0 removed from Table 1, Table 2,
Table 3, and Table X1.1 and placed in “Inactive Alloys” Tables
in X3.1.
(7) Metric equivalents adjusted in sections 8.1.1 and 14.1.1.
(8) Terminology B 881 added to Section 2.
(9) Removed references to Test Method E 227 from 2.2, 9.1,
and 16.1.
(10) Removed references to MIL-I-13857 from 2.6 and 19.2.
(11) Replaced MIL-STD-278 with NAVSEA Technical Publi-
cation S9074-AR-GIB-010/278 in 19.1.7.
(12) Added references to Practice D 3951 in 2.2 and 25.4.
(13) Added 1.7, safety caveat.
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 26/B 26M – 01) that may
impact the use of this standard. (Approved Oct. 10, 2002.)
(1) References to Practice B 597 were replaced with Practice
B 917/B 917M in Section 2, 12.2 and 17.1.
(2) A column in Table 2 was changed to read “Elongation in 2
in. or 4 x diameter, min, %”.
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
B 26/B 26M – 03
14
Designation: B 37 – 03
Standard Specification for
Aluminum for Use in Iron and Steel Manufacture 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 37; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification covers aluminum and aluminum al-
loys in the form of ingots, bars, rods, cones, nuggets or shot,
designated as shown in Table 1, for use in the manufacture of
iron and steel.
1.2 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard. The values given in parentheses are
mathematical conversions to SI units, which are provided for
information only and are not considered standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products2
B 881 Terminology Relating to Aluminum and Magnesium-
Alloy Products2
D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum-Base Alloys5
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition5
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition5
E 607 Test Method for Atomic Emission Spectrometric
Analysis Aluminum Alloys by the Point-to-Plane Tech-
nique, Nitrogen Atmosphere5
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis5
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to-Plane, Unipolar Self Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Refer to Terminology B 881 for definitions
of product terms used in this specification.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 bar—a form of aluminum deoxidizing product with a
rectangular cross section, similar to the appearance of a brick.
3.2.2 cone—a form of aluminum deoxidizing product with a
round flat base and a pointed end.
3.2.3 deox—a common or commercial term used in place of
aluminum deoxidizing product.
3.2.4 nugget—a form of aluminum deoxidizing product
with a non-uniform (lump) shape.
3.2.5 shot—a form of aluminum deoxidizing product with a
spheroid appearance of a pellet.
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.01 on
Aluminum Alloy Ingots and Castings.
Current edition approved April 10, 2003. Published August 2003. Originally
approved in 1920. Last previous edition approved in 2001 as B 37 – 96 (2001).
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.09.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
TABLE 1 Chemical Limits
NOTE 1—Analysis shall be made only for copper, zinc, magnesium,
silicon, and iron unless the determination of additional elements is
required by the contract or order, or the presence of other elements in
substantial concentration is indicated during the course of the analysis. In
the latter case, the amount of these other elements shall be determined,
reported, and the total of copper, zinc, magnesium, silicon, iron, and
“other elements” shall not exceed the specified amount prescribed in the
last column of the table. Unless otherwise specified in the contract or
order, 0.2 % or more of any “other element” shall constitute a “substantial
concentration” and require that element to be reported.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For
purposes of determining conformance to these limits, an observed value or
a calculated value obtained from analysis shall be rounded to the nearest
unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified
limit in accordance with the rounding-off method of Practice E 29.
Grade
Composition, %
Aluminum,
min, by
Difference
Copper,
max
Zinc,
max
Magnesium,
max
Total of All
Impurities,
max
990A 99.0 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0
980A 98.0 0.2 0.2 0.5 2.0
950A 95.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 5.0
920A 92.0 4.0 1.5 1.0 8.0
900A 90.0 4.5 3.0 2.0 10.0
850A 85.0 5.0 5.5 2.5 15.0
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following:
4.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, the year, and the revision letter, if applicable),
4.1.2 Grade of material (see Table 1),
4.1.3 Form of material (ingot, bar, rod, cone, nugget or
shot),
4.1.4 Any required dimensional or weight limitations for the
material, and
4.1.5 The quantityin either pieces or pounds (kilograms).
4.2 Additionally, orders for material to this specification
shall include the following information when required by the
purchaser:
4.2.1 Special packaging (see Section 7),
4.2.2 Whether Practices B 660 applies and, if so, the levels
of preservation, packaging and packing required (see 7.4),
4.2.3 Whether Practice D 3951 applies (see 7.4),
4.2.4 If inspection is required at manufacturer’s plant (see
Section 8),
4.2.5 Whether certificate of conformance is required (see
6.3 and 10.1), and
4.2.6 Whether a certified chemical analysis is required (see
6.3, 6.9, and 6.10).
5. Quality Assurance
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the producer shall be responsible for the performance of
all inspections and test requirements specified herein. Unless
disapproved by the purchaser, the producer may use his own or
any other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspec-
tion and test requirements specified herein. The purchaser shall
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set
forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed
necessary to confirm that the material conforms to prescribed
requirements.
5.2 All testing shall be performed in accordance to appli-
cable ASTM test methods.
5.3 The material covered by this specification shall be free
of dross, slag, and other harmful contamination.
5.4 Shot:
5.4.1 Hollow shells shall not exceed 10 % by count in a
minimum sample of 340 shot. The surface of material in shot
form shall be free from a heavy oxidized coating.
5.4.2 The bulk density of shot shall not be less than 90
lb/ft3.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 Limits—The average analysis of each lot of material
shall conform to the chemical composition limits specified in
Table 1. Conformance shall be determined by the producer’s
analysis of samples from each cast, with the average analysis
determined from the analytical results of all samples taken for
that cast (see 6.9). Analytical samples from each cast shall be
taken at the time the ingots, bars, rods, cones, nuggets or shot
are produced or samples may be taken from the finished
product. If the producer has determined the chemical compo-
sition of the material during the course of manufacture,
sampling and analysis of the finished product shall not be
required.
6.2 Methods of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
cal (Test Methods E 34), or spectrochemical (Test Methods
E 607 and E 1251) methods.
6.3 When an actual chemical analysis or a certificate of
conformance is required with a shipment, it shall be called for
in the contract or purchase order.
6.4 Lot Definition—A lot shall be defined as follows:
6.4.1 A “lot” in a batch process shall consist of that product
produced in a continuous cast from one furnace or ladle. Once
the furnace or ladle has been alloyed and casting starts, no
hardeners, liquid or solid material shall be added to the furnace
or ladle.
6.4.2 A “lot” in a continuous process shall consist of that
product produced during a continuous cast from one furnace
during a period of up to 24 h. Additions of hardeners, liquid or
solid material are added to the furnace during the casting of
product.
6.4.3 Any manufacturing change in the furnace, casting
equipment or continuity of operation, which potentially effects
the product characteristics defined by this specification shall be
considered as the start of a new lot.
6.5 When samples are taken at the time the molten metal is
made into shot, rod, bar, nuggets, cones or ingot, at least one
sample shall be taken from each source of molten metal.
6.6 Sampling Frequency—The frequency of samples taken
for determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
6.6.1 In a batch production process, samples shall be taken
periodically throughout the production of each lot. Each
sample shall be representative of approximately equal volumes
of the material. The frequency of sampling shall be not less
than one sample for every 20 % of the volume of the furnace
or ladle from which the material is being poured with a
minimum of three samples per lot.
6.6.2 In a continuous production process, samples shall be
taken periodically throughout the production of each lot. Each
sample shall be representative of approximately equal volumes
of the material. The frequency of sampling shall be not less
than one sample for every 20 % of the volume of the furnace
or ladle from which the material is being poured with a
minimum of five samples per lot.
6.7 Sampling of Finished Product—The number of samples
taken for determination of chemical composition shall be as
follows:
6.7.1 When the metal is shipped in carload lots of the same
grade and cast, not less than five samples shall be taken at
random from the carload for sampling. If the shipment is in less
than carload lots or in mixed grades, one sample shall be taken
for each 6000 lb (2700 kg) or fraction thereof.
6.8 Sample Preparation—Samples shall be taken and pre-
pared as follows:
6.8.1 A sample shall consist of an ingot, bar or section of
rod and in the case of material in shot, cone or nugget form, a
sample shall consist of a sufficient material to make a repre-
sentative sample.
B 37 – 03
2
6.8.2 Sampling for spectrochemical analysis shall be in
accordance with Practices E 716. Samples for other methods of
analysis shall be suitable for the form of material being
analyzed and the type of analytical method used.
6.8.3 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken by
drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a piece or pieces
to obtain a representative prepared sample of not less than 75
g. Sampling shall be in accordance with Practice E 55 for rod
and Practice E 88 for all other forms.
6.9 The certified chemical composition of a lot shall be the
average of the analytical results from testing of all samples
taken for that lot.
6.10 When lots are mixed, the certified chemical composi-
tion of a composite lot shall be the weighted average of the
certified chemical compositions from each lot that is contained
in the composite lot.
7. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
7.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packaging and gross weight of individual containers
shall be left to the discretion of the producer unless otherwise
agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers shall be so
selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical equip-
ment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each package or
container shall contain only one size and one grade of material
when packed for shipment unless otherwise agreed upon
between the purchaser and producer.
7.2 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, quantity, specification number, grade,
gross and net weights, and the name of the producer.
7.3 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
7.4 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged and packed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Practices B 660. The applicable
levels shall be as specified in the contract or order. Marking for
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Practice
D 3951.
8. Source Inspection
8.1 If the purchaser elects to make an inspection of produc-
tion or the material at the manufacturer’s works, it shall be so
stated in the contract or purchase order.
8.2 If the purchaser elects to have inspection made at the
producer’s facilities, the manufacturer shall afford the inspec-
tor all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with this specification and/or the
requirements of the contract. All tests and inspection shall be
so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the opera-
tion of the works.
9. Rejectionand Rehearing
9.1 Any ingots, bars, rods, cones, nuggets or shot that at the
time of receipt does not conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected, and shall be replaced by the
producer.
9.2 In the case of dissatisfaction regarding rejections based
on quality or chemical composition requirements as specified
in Sections 5 and 6, respectively, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing as a basis of arbitration within 15
calendar days after receipt by the producer of the rejection
notification.
10. Certification
10.1 The manufacturer shall, on request, furnish to the
purchaser a certificate stating that each lot has been sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification, and
has met the requirements of Sections 5, 6.1, 6.9, and 6.10.
11. Keywords
11.1 aluminum; deox; deoxidizing; iron manufacture; steel
manufacture
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 37–96 (2001)) that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved April 10, 2003).
(1) Rewrite of standard.
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
B 37 – 03
3
Designation: B 80 – 01
Standard Specification for
Magnesium-Alloy Sand Castings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 80; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers magnesium-alloy sand cast-
ings designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI values in parentheses are provided for
information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 93/B93M Specification for Magnesium Alloys in Ingot
Form for Sand Castings, Permanent Mold Castings, and
Die Castings2
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 296 Practice for Temper Designations of Magnesium
Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products2
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products2
B 661 Practice for Heat Treatment of Magnesium Alloys2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys4
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition4
E 94 Guide for Radiographic Testing5
E 155 Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminum
and Magnesium Castings5
E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination
Method5
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)6
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis7
2.3 Federal Standards:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)8
Fed. Std. No. 184 Identification Marking of Aluminum,
Magnesium and Titanium8
2.4 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage (Military
Agencies)8
MIL-STD-276 Impregnation of Porous Non-ferrous Metal
Castings8
MIL-I-13857 Impregnation of Metal Castings8
MIL-M-46062 Magnesium Alloy Castings, High Strength8
MIL-M-6857 Heat Treatment of Magnesium Alloy Cast-
ings8
2.5 ANSI Standard:9
ANSI Z1.4 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection
by Attributes
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 casting lot—unless otherwise agreed, shall consist of
not more than 1000 pounds of cleaned castings from the same
melt or heat, except where this weight limit may be exceeded
by a single casting. In such cases, each casting shall be
considered a lot.
3.1.2 heat treat lot—for the purpose of mechanical property
testing, a lot shall consist of all castings heat treated in the
same furnace charge to the same temper.
3.1.3 sand casting—metal object produced by pouring mol-
ten metal into a sand mold and allowing it to solidify.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for castings under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Applicable drawing or part number,
4.1.2 Quantity of each casting,1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys, and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Apr. 10, 2001. Published May 2001. Originally
published as B 80 – 30 T. Last previous edition B 80 – 97.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
7 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
8 Available from Standardization Documents, Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, ATTN: NPODS.
9 Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 W. 42nd St., 13th
Floor, New York, NY 10036.
1
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
4.1.3 Specification number and title,
4.1.4 Alloy (Section 9 and Table 1),
4.1.5 Temper (Section 11, Table 2 and X1.2),
4.1.6 Whether foundry control is required (Section 8),
4.1.7 Whether test specimens cut from castings are required
in addition to, or instead of, separately cast test specimens
(Section 12 and Table X1.2),
4.1.8 Whether liquid penetrant inspection is required (15.2),
4.1.9 Whether radiographic inspection is required (15.3),
4.1.10 Whether pressure testing is required (15.4),
4.1.11 Whether source inspection is required (Section 17),
4.1.12 Whether repairs are permissible (Section 19),
4.1.13 Whether chemical analysis and mechanical property
reports or certifications, or both, are required (Section 20),
4.1.14 Whether special packaging is required for shipment
(Section 22).
5. Responsibility for Quality Assurance
5.1 Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the supplier is respon-
sible for the performance of all inspection requirements as
specified herein. Exceptas otherwise specified in the contract
or order, the supplier may use his own or any other facilities
suitable for the performance of the inspection requirements
specified herein, unless disapproved by the purchaser. The
purchaser reserves the right to perform any of the inspections
set forth in the specification where such inspections are deemed
necessary to ensure supplies and services conform to pre-
scribed requirements.
6. Material Requirements
6.1 Unless otherwise specified, only magnesium alloy in-
gots or producer’s foundry scrap conforming to Specification
B 93 shall be used for pouring castings. Additions of small
amounts of grain refining elements and material for melt
process losses are permitted.
6.2 Pure materials and master alloys may be used provided
chemical analysis verifying conformance to Table 1 is done
prior to pouring any castings.
7. Manufacture
7.1 The responsibility of furnishing castings that can be laid
out and machined to the finished dimensions within the
permissible variations specified, as shown on the blueprints or
drawings, shall rest with the supplier, except when pattern
equipment is furnished by the purchaser. Sufficient stock shall
be allowed for shrinkage, and where requested, for finishing;
but castings of excessive weight shall not be furnished.
7.2 The castings may be subjected to such heat treatment as
deemed necessary to produce material that will conform to the
requirements specified. Heat treatment shall be performed on
the whole of a casting, never on a part only, and shall be
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements A
NOTE 1—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is
suspected or indicated in amounts greater than the specified limits, further analysis shall be made to determine that these elements are not present inexcess
of the specified limits.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value
obtained from analysis shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
Alloy NumberB Composition %
ASTM UNS Iron
Magne-
sium
Alu-
minum
Man-
ganese
Zinc
Rare
Earths
Zirconium Silicon Copper Nickel
Others
(Metallic
Impurities)
Each
TotalC
Impu-
rities
AM100A M10100 ... remainder 9.3–10.7 0.10–0.35 0.30 ... ... ... 0.30 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
AZ63A M11630 ... remainder 5.3–6.7 0.15–0.35 2.5–3.5 ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 0.01 ... 0.30
AZ81A M11810 ... remainder 7.0–8.1 0.13–0.35 0.40–1.0 ... ... ... 0.30 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
AZ91C M11914 ... remainder 8.1–9.3 0.13–0.35 0.40–1.0 ... ... ... 0.30 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
AZ91E M11919 0.005D remainder 8.1–9.3 0.17–0.35 0.40–1.0 ... ... ... 0.20 0.015 0.0010 0.01 0.30
AZ92A M11920 ... remainder 8.3–9.7 0.10–0.35 1.6–2.4 ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 0.01 ... 0.30
EQ21AE M18330 ... remainder ... ... ... ... 1.5–3.0F 0.40–1.0 ... 0.05–0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
EZ33A M12330 ... remainder ... ... 2.0–3.1 ... 2.5–4.0 0.50–1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
K1A M18010 ... remainder ... ... ... ... ... 0.40–1.0 ... ... ... ... 0.30
QE22AG M18220G ... remainder ... ... ... ... 1.8–2.5F 0.40–1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
WE43A M18430 0.01 remainder ... 0.15 0.20 3.7–4.3 2.4–4.4H 0.40–1.0 0.01 0.03 0.005 0.2 ...
WE43B M18432 0.010 remainder ... 0.03 0.20I 3.7–4.3 2.4–4.4H 0.40–1.0 ... 0.02 0.005 0.01J ...
WE54A M18410 ... remainder ... 0.03 0.20 4.75–5.5 1.5–4.0H 0.40–1.0 0.01 0.03 0.005 0.20 ...
ZC63A M16331 ... remainder ... 0.25–0.75 5.5–6.5 ... ... ... 0.20 2.4–3.0 0.01 ... 0.30
ZE41A M16410 ... remainder ... 0.15 3.5–5.0 ... 0.75–1.75 0.40–1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
ZE63A M16630 ... remainder ... ... 5.5–6.0 ... 2.1–3.0 0.40–1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 ... 0.30
ZK51A M16510 ... remainder ... ... 3.6–5.5 ... ... 0.50–1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 0.30
ZK61A M16610 ... remainder ... ... 5.5–6.5 ... ... 0.6–1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 0.30
ALimits are in weight % max unless shown as a range or stated otherwise.
BASTM alloy designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275. UNS designations were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
CIncludes listed elements for when no specific limit is shown.
DIf iron exceeds 0.005 %, the iron to manganese ratio shall not exceed 0.032.
ESilver content for alloy EQ21A shall be 1.3 to 1.7 %.
FRare earth elements are in the form of didymium, with not less than 70 % neodymium, and the remainder substantially praesodymium.
GSilver content for alloy QE22A shall be 2.0 to 3.0 %.
HRare earths are 2.0 to 2.5, 2.0 to 2.5, and 1.5 to 2.0 % Neodymium for WE43A, WE43B, and WE54A, respectively, the remainder being heavy rare earths.
IZinc + Silver shall not exceed this value.
JLithium shall not exceed 0.2 %.
B 80
2
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
applied in a manner that will produce the utmost uniformity.
NOTE 1—Alloy ZE63A requires solution heat treatment in hydrogen as
explained in X1.1.12.
8. Foundry Control
8.1 When specified, castings shall be produced under
foundry control approved by the purchaser. Foundry control
shall consist of examination of the castings by radiographic or
other approved methods for determining internal discontinui-
ties until the gating, pouring, and other foundry practices have
been established to produce castings meeting the quality
standards set by purchaser or agreed to between the purchaser
and the producer. When foundry practices have been so
established, the production method shall not be significantly
changed without demonstrating to the satisfaction of the
purchaser that the change does not adversely affect the quality
of the castings. Minor changes in pouring temperature of
650°F from the established nominal temperature are permis-
sible.
9. Chemical Composition Requirements
9.1 Limits—The castings shall conform to the chemical
composition limits prescribed in Table 1. Conformance shall be
determined by analyzing samples taken when the castings are
poured, or by analyzing samples taken from the finished
product. If the chemical composition has been determined
during the course of manufacture, sampling and analysis of the
finished product shall not be necessary.
10. Sampling for Chemical Composition
10.1 For determination of chemical composition, one
sample of each casting lot shall be taken in accordance with
Practice E 88 for chemical analysis or Practice E 716 for
spectrochemical analysis.
10.1.1 Samples for other methods of chemical analysis shall
be suitable for the form of material being analyzed and the type
of analytical method used. In case of dispute, analyses should
be made by methods given in Methods E 35.
11. Heat Treatment
11.1 Unless otherwise specified, heat treatment for the
applicable tempers designated in Table 2 and X1.2 shall be in
accordance with Military Specification MIL-M-6857 or Prac-
tice B 661. Heat treatment shall be performed on the whole
casting and never on a portion.
11.2 Each heat treat furnace charge shall contain at least one
set of test bars of the same composition range as the castings.
The satisfactory heat treatment of the furnace charge shall be
determined by the results from these test bars, which must
conform to the requirements of Table 2 or Table X1.2 where
required.
12. Tensile Requirements
12.1 Limits—The tension test specimens representing the
castings shall conform to the requirements of Table 2.
12.2 Number of Tests—At least one tension test specimen
shall be tested from each casting lot, or fraction thereof, to
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded to the
nearest 0.1 ksi and each value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 %, both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
AlloyNumber
TemperA
Tensile Strength, min,
ksi (MPa)
Yield StrengthB (0.2 %
offset), min, ksi (MPa)
Elongation in 2 in., (50.8
mm) min, %ASTM UNS
AM100A M10100 T6 35.0(241) 17.0(117) C
AZ63A M11630 F 26.0(179) 11.0(76) 4
T4 34.0(234) 11.0(76) 7
T5 26.0(179) 12.0(83) 2
T6 34.0(234) 16.0(110) 3
AZ81A M11810 T4 34.0(234) 11.0(76) 7
AZ91C M11914 F 23.0(158) 11.0(76) C
T4 34.0(234) 11.0(76) 7
T5 23.0(158) 12.0(83) 2
T6 34.0(234) 16.0(110) 3
AZ91E M11919 T6 34.0(234) 16.0(110) 3
AZ92A M11920 F 23.0(158) 11.0(76) C
T4 34.0(234) 11.0(76) 6
T5 23.0(158) 12.0(83) C
T6 34.0(234) 18.0(124) 1
EQ21A M18330 T6 34.0(234) 25.0(172) 2
EZ33A M12330 T5 20.0(138) 14.0(96) 2
K1A M18010 F 24.0(165) 6.0(41) 14
QE22A M18220 T6 35.0(241) 25.0(172) 2
WE43A M18430 T6 32.0(221) 25.0(172) 2
WE43B M18432 T6 32.0(221) 25.0(172) 2
WE54A M18410 T6 37.0(255) 26.0(179) 2
ZC63A M16331 T6 28.0(193) 18.0(125) 2
ZE41A M16410 T5 29.0(200) 19.5(133) 2.5
ZE63A M16630 T6 40.0(276) 27.0(186) 5
ZK51A M16510 T5 34.0(234) 20.0(138) 5
ZK61A M16610 T6 40.0(276) 26.0(179) 5
AThese temper designations were established in accordance with Practice B 296.
BSee X1.4.1.
CNot required.
B 80
3
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
represent the castings poured from the same melt. If the
castings are to be heat treated, the specimens shall be heat
treated with production castings of the same alloy and in the
same temper as the specimens. The specimens shall then be
tested to judge the ability of their corresponding melts to
respond to the type of heat treatment to which the specimens
were subjected.
12.2.1 Test Specimens—The tension test specimens shall be
separately cast in the system sand mix in use and shall be cast
to size in accordance with the dimensions shown in Fig. 1 or
Fig. 2.
12.3 When specified, the tensile strength and yield strength
values of specimens cut from castings shall conform to Table
X1.2. Elongation values shall not be less than 25 % of the
values specified in Table 2.
12.3.1 When tensile properties of castings are to be deter-
mined, tension test specimens shall be cut from the locations
designated on the drawing. If no locations are designated,
specimens shall be taken from each test casting to include at
least one from the thinnest and one from thickest section of the
casting. At least three specimens are required.
12.3.2 The machined tension test specimen shall be the
standard 0.500 in. diameter specimen or the largest smaller size
specimen proportional to the standard specimen shown in Fig.
8 of Test Methods B 557.
12.3.3 Where a round specimen is not feasible a standard1⁄2
in. wide rectangular specimen shown in Fig. 6 of Test Methods
B 557 may be used, but in no case shall its area be less than that
of the sub size1⁄4 in. wide specimen.
12.4 If any tension test specimen is improperly machined or
shows flaws upon testing, it may be discarded and another
specimen for the same heat or melt used instead. If no
Metric Equivalents
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
0.500 12.70 7⁄8 22.2 13⁄8 34.9 3 76.2
0.510 12.95 1 25.4 15⁄8 41.37 31⁄4 82.5
3⁄8 9.5 11⁄8 28.6 2 50.8 6 152.4
1⁄2 12.7 11⁄4 31.8 23⁄4 69.8 93⁄16 233.4
5⁄8 15.9
FIG. 1 AFS Test Bar for Sand-Cast Magnesium Alloys
B 80
4
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
additional specimen is available, the supplier and the purchaser
shall agree on an alternative procedure.
12.5 Test Methods—The tension tests shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods B 557.
12.6 Mechanical properties at 400 to 500°F—Alloys
EQ21A, EZ33A, QE22A, WE54A, WE43A and WE43B shall
be capable of meeting the requirements shown in Table X1.2
when tested in the following manner. Tensile test specimens
shall be heated to 400 to 500°F6 5°F, as applicable, held for 10
min before testing and loaded at this temperature at a rate of
0.005 in./in./min up to the yield strength, and at a rate of 0.10
in./in./min above the yield strength.
13. Special Test Methods
13.1 When the castings have critical functional require-
ments, special tests to simulate the stress conditions incurred in
service may be requested. The requirements and methods of
these tests shall be as agreed upon between the producer and
the purchaser.
14. Finish
14.1 The finished castings shall be uniform in quality, free
of injurious blowholes, porosity, shrinkage, cracks and other
discontinuities except as designated and agreed upon as ac-
ceptable by the purchaser.
14.2 Unless otherwise specified, the castings shall be
chrome-pickled prior to shipment (see X1.5).
15. Foundry Inspection
15.1 Requirements of surface finish parting lines, and re-
moval of gates and risers may be checked visually. It is
advisable to have mutually agreed upon observational stan-
dards to represent acceptable material.
15.2 Liquid Penetrant Inspection:
15.2.1 When specified liquid penetrant inspection shall be
in accordance with Practice E 165, and the required sensitivity
shall be specified.
15.2.2 Acceptance standards for discontinuities shall be
agreed upon, including size and frequency per unit area and
location.
15.3 Radiographic Inspection:
15.3.1 When specified, radiographic inspection shall be in
accordance with Guide E 94 and Reference Radiographs E 155
to determine soundness. Areas of the casting subject to
soundness requirements shall be specified by the purchaser. It
NOTE 1—This test bar mold is particularly suitable for those magnesium alloys containing Zr.
FIG. 2 Proposed Gating System for ASTM Magnesium Test Bars
B 80
5
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
is advisable to document an agreed upon radiographic tech-
nique including source parameters, film size, and orientation of
the radiographs.
15.3.2 Radiographic acceptance shall be in accordance with
requirements selected from Table 3. Any modifications of this
table and the frequency per unit area and location should also
be agreed upon between the producer and purchaser.
15.4 When specified, the castings shall be subject to hydro-
static or aerostatic pressure as required. Acceptance pressure
and allowable leak rates shall be specified by the purchaser.
NOTE 2—Warning: Take appropriate safety precautions to protect
inspectors prior to any pressure application.
16. Sampling for Foundry Inspection
16.1 For the purpose of visual and dimensional examina-
tion, casting lots may be combined up to a maximum of 5000
lbs. From this accumulated lot, a sample shall be selected at
random in accordance with the tables of ANSI Z1.4 at
inspection level II, with lot acceptance and rejection based on
acceptable quality level (AQL) equal to 1.5 % defective. When
the accumulation of lots is not practical, the sample shall be
selected from each casting lot. Samples selected for dimen-
sional examination may be the same as those selected for visual
examination, but the determination of acceptance or rejection
shall not be based on the cumulative sample for both charac-
teristics.
16.2 For the purpose of liquid penetrant or radiographic
inspection, a random sample of castings shall be selected from
each casting lot. The number of castings selected shall be in
accordance with ANSI Z1.4 at inspection quality level II with
lot acceptance and rejection based on AQL of 0.65 % defective.
16.3 Sampling for hydrostatic and aerostatic pressure tests
shall be as specified by the purchaser.
16.4 Modifications of the above sampling plans must be
agreed upon between the producer and the purchaser.
17. Source Inspection
17.1 If the purchaser desires that inspection be made at the
supplier’s works where the material is made, it shall be so
stated in the contract or purchase order.
17.1.1 If the purchaser electsto have the inspection made at
the supplier’s works, the supplier shall afford the inspector
representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
specificaiton. All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as
not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
18. Rejection, Retest and Rehearing
18.1 Material failing to conform to the requirements of this
specification, or in which defects are found during subsequent
manufacturing operations, may be rejected. If rejected, the
supplier shall be responsible only for replacement of the
material to the purchaser. As much as possible of the rejected
original material shall be returned to the supplier.
18.1.1 Any sample unit containing one or more character-
istics which fail to meet any of the requirements of this
standard shall be rejected. If the number of defective units in
any sample exceeds the acceptance number specified for that
sample size, the entire lot represented by the sample shall be
rejected.
18.1.2 A rejected lot may be screened by 100 % inspection
for the rejectable item and resubmitted for acceptance inspec-
tions. Any deviation from this procedure must be approved by
the purchaser.
18.2 Retests—If the results of the tension tests of alloys in
heat-treated tempers do not conform to the requirements
prescribed in Table 2 or Table X1.2, the castings may be reheat
treated but not more than twice. The results of acceptable tests
shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties
specified in Table 2 or Table X1.2.
18.3 In the case of dissatisfaction regarding rejections, the
producer may make a claim for rehearing as the basis for
arbitration within a reasonable time after receipt by the
producer of the rejection notification.
19. Repair of Castings
19.1 Castings shall not be repaired by welding, impregna-
tion, peening, excess blendings resulting in out of drawing
tolerance dimension, or other methods without permission of
the purchaser. Soldering shall not be performed under any
conditions. Limitations on the extent and frequency of repairs,
and methods of inspection of repaired areas shall be as agreed
upon by the producer and purchaser. Repaired castings shall be
re-examined in accordance with the applicable areas of the
drawings, specifications and directives and shall fully comply
with all the requirements of this standard.
19.2 Welding—When welding is permitted, it shall be done
by methods suitable for the particular alloy. Welding methods
shall be in accordance with such specifications as are refer-
enced on the applicable drawings, or as are required by the
contract or order. Periodic checks of welded castings shall be
made to ensure a satisfactory procedure for welding is being
adhered to by the producer.
TABLE 3 Discontinuity-Level Requirements for Magnesium Sand Castings (Reference Radiographs E 155)
Discontinuity Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
Section Thickness, in.
1⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4
Gas holes none 1 1 2 2 5 5
Microshrinkage (feathery) none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Microshrinkage (sponge) none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Foreign material (less dense) none 1 1 2 2 4 4
Foreign material (more dense) none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Cracks
Cold shuts
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
Surface irregularity
Core shift
not to exceed drawing tolerance
not to exceed drawing tolerence
B 80
6
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
19.2.1 All welding shall be done by qualified welders
approved by the purchaser.
19.2.2 When castings are to be supplied in the heat treated
condition, they shall be heat treated or re-heated treated, with
proper precautions against germination, to the required temper
after welding. Small arc welds may be performed without
subsequent heat treatment upon approval of the purchaser.
19.2.3 When specified, castings that have been repaired by
welding shall have the welded areas examined radiographically
after all reworking and heat treatments have been completed.
19.2.4 All welds shall be free of cracks, excess gas, oxides,
porosity and lack of fusion.
19.2.5 Welded castings shall be marked with a symbol of
three concentric circles with a letter or number designating the
welder adjacent to the symbol. The outer circle of the symbol
shall not be larger than1⁄4 in. outside diameter. All welded
areas shall be encircled with a ring of white paint prior to
submission for final inspection.
19.3 Impregnation—When impregnation is permitted it
shall be only to correct general seepage leaks and shall not be
used to correct poor foundry technique or significant porosity.
It shall be accomplished in accordance with such specifications
as may be shown on the drawing or that may be required by the
contract or order, provided that, if no specifications are
stipulated, the method used shall be approved by the procuring
agency. Unless otherwise authorized, castings which have been
impregnated shall be markedIMP. Impregnation of castings
shall be in accordance with Military Standard MIL-STD-276.
For Aeronautical and Army Quartermaster Corps use, impreg-
nants used shall be in accordance with Military Specification
MIL-I-13857.
19.4 Peening—Where peening is permitted it shall be only
to correct localized minor seepage leaks and small surface
imperfections, or to disclose sub-surface voids for the purpose
of inspection. Peening shall not be permitted to repair cracks,
cold shuts, shrinks, mis-runs, defects due to careless handling,
or other similar major defects. Peening may be accomplished
either hot or cold and shall be performed by methods which are
accepatble to the inspector. Peened castings shall be marked
with a maltese cross approximately1⁄4 in. high.
19.5 Blending—Blending with suitable grinders or other
tools shall be permitted only for the removal of surface
imperfections and shall not result in dimensions below mini-
mum drawing tolerances.
20. Certification
20.1 The supplier shall, on request, furnish to the purchaser
a certificate stating that the material has been sampled and
inspected in accordance with this specification, and has met the
requirements.
21. Identification and Repair Marking
21.1 Identification—Unless otherwise specified, each cast-
ing shall be marked with the applicable drawing or part
number. The marking shall consist of raised Arabic numerals,
and when applicable, capitol letters, cast integral. The location
of the identification marking shall be as specified on the
drawing, the drawing/part number shall be placed in a location
mutually agreeable to the purchaser and producer.
21.1.1 Lot Identification—When practical, each casting
shall also be marked with the lot number.
21.2 Repair Markings—All identification markings indicat-
ing repairs as specified in 19.2.5, 19.3 and 19.4 shall be made
with a waterproof marking fluid.
22. Packaging and Marking for Shipment
22.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified, the castings
shall be packaged to provide adequate protection during
normal handling and transportation. Each package shall con-
tain only one type of item unless otherwise agreed upon. The
type of packaging and gross weight of containers shall, unless
otherwise agreed upon, be at the supplier’s discretion, provided
they are such as to ensure acceptance by common or other
carriers for safe transportation at the lowest rate to the delivery
point.
22.2 Marking—Each shipping container shall be legibly
marked with the purchase order number, gross and net weights,
and the supplier’s name. Marking for shipment shall be in
accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and
MIL-STD-129 for military agencies. When specified in the
contract or purchase order materials shall be marked in
accordance with Fed. Std. 184.
22.3 Preservation—Material intended for prolonged storage
in unheated locations shall be adequately packed and protected
to avoid deterioration anddamage. When specified in the
contract or purchase order, material shall be preserved, pack-
aged, and packed in accordance with the requirements of
Practice B 660. The applicable levels shall be as specified in
the contract or order.
22.4 When required, an examination of preparation for
delivery shall be made to determine compliance with the
packing requirements. The sample unit shall be one shipping
container fully prepared for delivery, randomly selected. Using
MIL-STD-105, the inspection level shall be an AQL of 4.0
expressed in terms of percent defective.
23. Keywords
23.1 sand castings; magnesium alloy
B 80
7
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. EXPLANATORY NOTES
X1.1 General Information
X1.1.1 Property limits in Table 2 are based on an analysis of
data from separately cast tension test bars and are established
at a level at which at least 99 % of the population of the values
meets the established value.
X1.1.2 Alloy AM100A has a specific gravity of about 1.81.
It is used both in the solution heat-treated temper and in the
solution heat-treated and aged temper. Aging increases the
yield strength and hardness and decreases the toughness and
elongation.
X1.1.3 Alloy AZ63A has a specific gravity of about 1.84. It
is used in the as-cast, the solution heat-treated, and the solution
heat-treated and aged tempers. Its properties are somewhat
better and its resistance to salt-water (NaCl) corrosion is
decidedly better than in the case of alloy AM100A.
X1.1.4 Alloy AZ81A has a specific gravity of about 1.80. It
is used primarily in the solution heat-treated temper. This alloy
will produce castings having maximum soundness with mod-
erate mechanical properties.
X1.1.5 Alloy AZ91C has a specific gravity of about 1.81. It
should be used for those applications requiring the maximum
of strength and hardness as well as ductility. Its mechanical
properties in the heat-treated and in the heat-treated and aged
temper are similar to those of AZ63A, but its foundry charac-
teristics are similar to AZ92A. It should be used in preference
to AZ62A. It should be used in preference to AZ63A if the
higher resistance to salt-water (NaCl) corrosion of the latter
composition is not required.
X1.1.6 Alloy AZ91E is a high purity version of AZ91C. As
a result it has very high resistance to salt-water (NaCl)
corrosion.
X1.1.7 Alloy EQ21A has lower silver content than QE22A
alloy but has similar mechanical properties.
X1.1.8 Alloy AZ92A has a specific gravity of about 1.82. It
is used where good soundness and mechanical properties are
required. The alloy is heat treatable and is then characterized
by high strength and hardness. Its resistance to salt-water
(NaCl) corrosion is approximately equivalent to that of Alloy
AZ63A. Alloy AZ92A in the heat-treated temper ages more
rapidly than Alloy AZ63A in the heat-treated temper. Under
service conditions where the castings attain a temperature of
200°F (93°C) or higher, the castings of Alloy AZ92A, heat
treated, will gradually change to the heat-treated and aged
temper.
X1.1.9 Alloy EZ33A has a specific gravity of about 1.84. It
is used in the artificially-aged temper. It is recommended for
use at elevated temperatures, especially in the range of 300 to
500°F (149 to 260°C). This alloy will produce sound castings
for pressure tightness.
X1.1.10 Alloy K1A is a low-strength alloy generally used
for its exceptionaly good damping characteristics.
X1.1.11 Alloy QE22A is primarily used where a high yield
strength is needed at temperatures up to 400°F (200°C).
X1.1.12 Alloy ZE41A has a specific gravity of about 1.84.
It is a versatile, medium strength, fully weldable and easily
castable alloy possessing good fatigue and creep properties.
This alloy will produce sound castings for pressure tightness.
At testing temperatures up to 320°F (160°C), the properties of
separately cast test bars bear a very close relationship to those
obtained from sound production castings, even where thick
(massive) sections are involved.
X1.1.13 Alloy ZE63A has a specific gravity of about 1.88.
It is readily castable, has high strength, good ductility and
excellent fatigue properties. It shows little or no tendency to
microporosity and provides distinct advantages in control of
quality. The alloy is designed to take advantage of a new
principal of heat treatment involving the inward diffusion of
hydrogen and formation of hydrides. A typical heat treatment is
as follows: Heat in hydrogen at 900°F (482°C) for 10, 24, 72
h (for 1⁄4 in., 1⁄2in., 3⁄4-in. sections respectively) to achieve full
hydriding. Quench and age 48 h at 285°F (141°C).
X1.1.14 Alloy ZK51A has a specific gravity of about 1.83.
It is used in the artificially aged temper. This alloy produces
castings combining a high yield strength with good elongation.
X1.1.15 Alloy ZK61A has a specific gravity of about 1.83.
It is used in the solution heat-treated and artificially aged
temper. This alloy produces castings of highest strength-to-
weight ratio and good elongation.
X1.1.16 Alloy WE43A and WE43B have a specific gravity
of 1.84. It can be used in castings requiring high yield strength
up to 500°F (260°C) and has very high resistance to salt water
(NaCl) corrosion.
X1.1.17 Alloy WE54A has a specific gravity of 1.85. It can
be used in castings requiring high yield strength up to 500°F
(260°C) and has very high resistance to salt water (NaCl)
corrosion. Ductility of alloy WE54A can fall as much as 50 %
when exposed to 250 to 400°F (120 to 200°C) for long periods
of time.
X1.1.18 Alloy ZC63A has a specific gravity of 1.87. It is
suitable for commercial applications where pressure tightness
and elevated temperature properties are required.
X1.2 Properties and Characteristics
X1.2.1 The data on properties and characteristics given in
Table X1.1 are approximate and are supplied for general
information only.
X1.3 Minimum Properties of Bars Cut from Castings
X1.3.1 The minimum properties of bars cut from castings
shown in Table X1.2 are given for information only and do not
form a part of this specification. The minimums in Table X1.2
are available for most castings although better properties may
be obtained in some castings or selected sections of other
castings. All properties of bars cut from castings require special
agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
B 80
8
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
X1.3.2 Military Specification MIL M-46062 High Strength
Magnesium Alloy Castings, covers castings of a premium
quality for which all properties required are from specimens
cut from the castings.
X1.4 Yield Strength and Brinell Hardness
X1.4.1 The yield strength of magnesium-base alloys is
defined as the stress at which the stress-strain curve deviates
0.2 % from the modulus line. It may be determined by the
“offset method” or the “extension-under-load method” (the
latter is often referred to as the “approximate method without
the stress-strain diagram”) as described in Methods B 557. In
case of dispute, the “offset method” shall be used. The data in
Table X1.3 give minimum yield strength values for the various
alloys, together with the corresponding unit deformations for
use with the “extension-under-load method” based on a modu-
lus of elasticity,E = 6 500 000 psi (44 800 MPa).
X1.4.2 The typical Brinell hardness numbers shown in
Table X1.3 were obtained using a 10-mm ball and 500-kgf
load. They are shown for information only.
X1.5 Chrome Pickling
X1.5.1 The chrome pickle affords measurable protection
against corrosion and tarnish during shipment and storage of
the castings. After pickling the castings will be gray to bronze
or yellow in color depending on alloy and temper. The chrome
pickle is not recommendedfor castings containing metal
inserts. Such castings should be ordered shipped without
surface treatment or protected with a slushing compound.
TABLE X1.1 Properties and Characteristics
Alloy Number
Melting Range
Approximate,°F (°C)
Pattern
Shrinkage
Allow-
ance,
in./ftA
(mm/m)
Foundry CharacteristicsB Other CharacteristicsB
ASTM UNS
Non-
equilib-
rium
SolidsC
Solidus Liquidus
Pres-
sure
Tight-
ness
FluidityD
Micro-
porosity
Tend-
encyE
Normally
Heat
Treated
Machin-
ingF
Electro-
platingG
Sur-
face
Treat-
mentH
Suita-
bility
to
BrazingI
Suita-
bility
to
WeldingJ
AM100A M10100 810 867(464) 1100(593) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 1 2 yes 1 2 2 no 1
AZ63A M11630 685 850(454) 1130(610) 5⁄32(13.0) 3 1 3 yes 1 1 1 no 3
AZ81A M11810 790 882(472) 1115(602) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 1 2 yes 1 2 2 no 1
AZ91C M11914 785 875(468) 1105(596) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 1 2 yes 1 2 2 no 1
AZ91E M11919 785 875(468) 1105(596) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 1 2 yes 1 2 2 no 1
AZ92A M11920 770 830(443) 1100(593) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 1 2 yes 1 2 2 no 2
EQ21A M18330 ... 995(535) 1184(640) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 2 2 yes 1 2 1 K 1
EZ33A M12390 ... 1010(543) 1189(643) 3⁄16(15.5) 1 2 1 yes 1 1 1 no 1
K1A M13010 ... ... 1205(652) 3⁄16(15.5) 2 2 2 no 1 3 2 K 1
QE22A M18220 ... 1020(549) 1190(643) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 2 2 yes 1 2 1 K 1
WE43A M18430 ... 1015(545) 1185(640) 3⁄16(15.5) 2 2 2 yes 1 K 2 K 2
WE43B M18432 ... 1015(545) 1185(640) 3⁄16(15.5) 2 2 2 yes 1 K 2 K 2
WE54A M18410 ... 1015(545) 1185(640) 3⁄16(15.5) 2 2 2 yes 1 K 2 K 2
ZC63A M16331 ... 870(465) 1020(550) 3⁄16(15.5) 1 2 2 yes 1 K 1 K 2
ZE41A M16410 ... 950(510) 1184(640) 5⁄32(13.0) 2 2 2 yes 1 1 1 no 2
ZE63A M16630 ... 510(266) 950(510) 3⁄16(15.5) 1 2 1 yes 1 K 1 no 1
ZK51A M16510 ... 1020(549) 1185(641) 5⁄32(13.0) 3 2 3 yes 1 2 1 no 3
ZK61A M16610 ... 985(529) 1175(635) 5⁄32(13.0) 3 2 3 yes 1 2 1 no 3
AAllowance for average castings. Shrinkage requirements will vary with intricacy of design and dimensions.
BRating of 1 indicates best of group; 3 indicates poorest of group.
CAs measured on metal solidified under normal casting conditions.
DAbility of liquid alloy to flow readily in mold and fill thin sections.
EBased on radiographic evidence.
FComposite rating based on ease of cutting, chip characteristics, quality of finish, and tool life. Ratings, in the case of heat-treatable alloys based on T6 type temper.
Other tempers, particularly the annealed temper, may have lower rating.
GAbility of casting to take and hold an electroplate applied by present standard methods.
HAbility of castings to be cleaned in standard pickle solutions and to be conditioned for best paint adhesion.
IRefers to suitability of alloy to withstand brazing temperature without excessive distortion or melting.
JBased on ability of material to be fusion welded with filler rod of same alloy, or of an alloy whose composition is recommended. ZE63A alloy must be welded before
its solution heat-treatment in hydrogen. It is not suitable for welding after such heat-treatment.
KInexperience with these alloys under wide production conditions makes it undesirable to supply ratings at this time.
B 80
9
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
TABLE X1.2 Tension Test Minimums for Specimens Cut from Castings
NOTE 1—The values in the table, both average and minimum, are representative of the weakest areas in any type casting for the composition listed,
that is, adjacent to gates and risers. Higher design properties for designated areas in castings are normally obtained and shall be as specified in the order.
Alloy Number
Temper
Temperature
of Testing
Tensile Strength, ksi (MPa) Yield Strength (0.2 % offset), ksi (MPa)
ASTM UNS avgA minB avgA minB
AZ63A M11310 T4 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 10.0(69) 9.0(62)
T6 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 14.5(99) 12.0(83)
AZ31A M11310 T4 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 10.0(69) 9.0(62)
AZ91C M11914 T4 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 10.0(69) 9.0(62)
T6 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 14.5(99) 12.0(83)
AZ91E M11919 T6 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 14.5(99) 12.0(83)
AZ92A M11920 T4 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 10.0(69) 9.0(62)
T6 room 25.5(173) 17.0(117) 16.0(110) 13.5(92)
EQ21A M18330 T6 room 32.0(221) 28(193) 23.0(158) 20.0(138)
T6 400°F ... 23.0(158) ... 18.0(124)
EZ33A M12330 T5 room 15.0(103) 13.0(90) 12.5(86) 11.0(76)
T5 500°F ... 10.0(69) ... 6.0(41)
QE22A M18220 T6 room 32.0(221) 28.0(113) 23.0(158) 20.0(138)
T6 400°F ... 24.0(165) ... 18.0(124)
WE43A M18430 T6 room 36.5(252) 31.5(215) 25.5(176) 22.0(152)
T6 482°F 30.5(210) 25.5(176) 22.5(155) 18.5(128)
WE43B M18432 T6 room 36.5(252) 31.5(215) 25.5(176) 22.0(152)
T6 482°F 30.5(210) 25.5(176) 22.5(155) 18.5(128)
WE54A M18410 T6 room 35.0(240) 30.5(210) 24.0(165) 23.0(160)
T6 482°F ... 27.0(185) ... 22.0(150)
ZC63A M16331 T6 room ... 27.0(185) ... 18.0(124)
ZE41A M16410 T5 room 28.0(193) 26.0(179) 19.5(135) 17.5(120)
ZE63A M16630 T6 room 37.0(255) 32.0(221) 24.0(165) 22.0(152)
ZK51A M16510 T5 room 29.0(209) 24.0(165) 17.0(117) 14.0(96)
ZK61A M16610 T6 room 34.0(234) 30.0(207) 21.0(145)
AThe average value of all specimens tested from each casting shall conform to the minimum average. Not less than three specimens shall be tested from each casting:
one from the thinnest section, one from the thickest section, and one from an intermediate section.
BAny specimen cut from a casting shall conform to the minimum value specified.
CWhere a value is not listed the minimum average percent elongation of specimens cut from a casting shall not be less than 25 % of the value specified for separately
cast test bars.
TABLE X1.3 Data for Use with “Extension-Under Load Method” and Typical Brinell Hardness
Alloy Number
Temper
Yield Strength (0.2 %
offset), min, ksi (MPa)
Unit Deformation, in./in.
(mm/mm) of gage length
Typical Brinell
Hardness Number, HBASTM UNS
AM100A M10100 T6 17.0 (117) 0.0046 69
AZ63A M11630 F 11.0 (76) 0.0037 50
T4 11.0 (76) 0.0037 55
T5 12.0 (83) 0.0038 55
T6 16.0 (110) 0.0045 73
AZ81A M11810 T4 11.0 (76) 0.0037 55
AZ91C M11914 F 11.0 (76) 0.0037 60
T4 11.0 (76) 0.0037 55
T5 12.0 (83) 0.0038 62
AZ91E M11919 T6 16.0 (110) 0.0045 70
T6 16.0 (110) 0.0045 70
AZ92A M11920 F 11.0 (76) 0.0037 65
T4 11.0 (76) 0.0037 63
T5 12.0 (83) 0.0038 69
T6 18.0 (129) 0.0048 81
EQ21A M18330 T6 25.0 (172) 0.0058 78
EZ33A M12330 T5 14.0 (96) 0.0042 50
K1A M18010 F 6.0 (41) 0.0029 ...
QE22A M18220 T6 25.0 (172) 0.0058 78
WE43A M18430 T6 25.0 (172) 0.0058 85
WE43B M18432 T6 25.0 (172) 0.0058 85
WE54A M18410 T6 26.0 (179) 0.0060 85
ZC63A M16331 T6 18.0 (125) 0.0050 60
ZE41A M16410 T5 19.5 (135) 0.0050 62
ZE63A M10030 T6 27.0 (186) 0.0062 ...
ZK51A M16510 T5 20.0 (138) 0.0051 65
ZK61A M16610 T6 26.0 (174) 0.0060 70
B 80
10
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individualreprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).
B 80
11
NOTICE: This standard has either been superseded and replaced by a new version or discontinued.
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
Designation: B 85 – 03
Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 85; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification covers aluminum-alloy die castings of
all compositions. Thirteen of the most commonly die cast alloy
compositions are specified, designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 Alloy and temper designations are in accordance with
ANSI H35.1. The equivalent unified numbering system alloy
designations are in accordance with Practice E 527.
1.3 For acceptance criteria for inclusion of new aluminum
and aluminum alloys and their properties in this specification,
see Annex A1 and Annex A2.
1.4 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard. The values given in parentheses are
mathematical conversions to SI units which are provided for
information only and are not considered standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory requirements prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 179 Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and
Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes2
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products2
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products2
B 881 Terminology Relating to Aluminum- and
Magnesium-Alloy Products2
D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum-Base Alloys6
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition6
E 505 Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminum
and Magnesium Die Castings7
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)8
E 607 Test Method for Atomic Emission Spectrometric
Analysis Aluminum Alloys by the Point-to-Plane Tech-
nique, Nitrogen Atmosphere6
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis6
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to-Plane, Unipolar Self-Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge6
2.3 AMS Standard:
AMS-STD-184 Identification Marking of Aluminum, Mag-
nesium and Titanium9
2.4 ANSI Standard:
H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Alumi-
num10
2.5 NADCA Product Specification Standards for Die Cast-
ings:11
Engineering and Design: Coordinate Dimensioning
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.01 on
Aluminum Alloy Ingots and Castings.
Current edition approved April 10, 2003. Published August 2003. Originally
approved in 1931. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as B 85 – 02.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.09.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
7 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
8 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
9 Available from SAE AEROSPACE, 400 Commonwealth Dr., Warrendale, PA
15096-0001.
10 Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
11 Available from North American Die Casting Association (NADCA), 9701 W.
Higgins Rd., Suite 880, Rosemont, IL 60018–4721.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
S-4A-1-00 Linear Dimensions: Standard Tolerances
S-4A-2-00 Parting Line: Standard Tolerances
S-4A-3-00 Moving Die Components (MDC): Standard Tol-
erances
S-4A-4-00 Draft Requirements: Standard Tolerances
S-4A-5-00 Flatness Requirements: Standard Tolerances
S-4A-6-00 Cored Holes for Cut Threads: Standard Toler-
ances
S-4A-8-00 Cored Holes for Pipe Threads: Standard Toler-
ances
P-4A-1-00 Linear Dimensions: Precision Tolerances
P-4A-2-00 Parting Line: Precision Tolerances
P-4A-3-00 Moving Die Components (MDC): Precision Tol-
erances
P-4A-4-00 Draft Requirements: Precision Tolerances
P-4A-5-00 Flatness Requirements: Precision Tolerances
P-4A-6-00 Cored Holes for Cut Threads: Precision Toler-
ances
P-4A-7-00 Cored Holes for Formed Threads: Precision
Tolerances
S/P-4-9-00 Machining Stock Allowances (Standard and
Precision) Engineering and Design: Additional Specifica-
tion Guidelines
G-6-1-00 Pressure Tightness in Die Cast Parts
G-6-2-00 Fillets, Ribs and Corners in Die cast Parts (1 of 2)
G-6-3-00 Fillets, Ribs and Corners in Die cast Parts (2 of 2)
G-6-4-00 Ejector Pins, Pin Marks and Pin Flash
G-6-5-00 Casting Flash removal
G-6-6-00 Surface Finish, As Cast
G-6-7-00 Die Cast Lettering and Ornamentation
2.6 Federal Standard:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)12
2.7 Military Standard:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage (Military
Agencies)12
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Refer to Terminology B 881 for definitions
of product terms used in this specification.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, the year, and the revision letter, if applicable),
4.1.2 The quantity in either pieces or pounds (kilograms),
4.1.3 Part name and number,
4.1.4 Alloy (see Section 8 and Table 1), and
4.1.5 Drawing of die casting, when required, giving all
necessary dimensions and showing latest revisions and allow-
ances for linear dimensions (10.2), parting lines (10.3), moving
die components (10.4), draft (10.5), flatness (10.6), cored hole
threads (10.7-10.9), and machining stock (10.10). Location of
ejector pin marks or parting lines shall be at the option of the
producer; unless specifically designated on the drawing.
4.2 Additional tests, options and special inspection require-
ments as provided below should be justified only on the basis
of need. These shall be specified in the contract or purchase
order, as additional procedures and extended delivery time may
be involved.
12 Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, Attn: NPODS.
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements A,B,C
DesignationD OthersE
AA No.
(ANSI)
(old)
ASTM
UNS Si Fe Cu Mn Mg Cr Ni Zn Ti Sn Each TotalF Aluminum
360.0 SG100B A03600 9.00-10.00 2.00 0.60 0.35 0.4-0.60 . . . 0.50 0.50 . . . 0.15 . . . 0.25 Remainder
A360.0SG100A A13600 9.00-10.00 1.30 0.60 0.35 0.40-0.60 . . . 0.50 0.50 . . . 0.15 . . . 0.25 Remainder
380.0 SC84B A03800 7.50-9.50 2.00 3.00-4.00 0.50 0.10 . . . 0.50 3.00 . . . 0.35 . . . 0.50 Remainder
A380.0G SC84C A13800 7.50-9.50 1.30 3.00-4.00 0.50 0.10 . . . 0.50 3.00 . . . 0.35 . . . 0.50 Remainder
383.0G SC102A A03830 9.50-11.50 1.30 2.00-3.00 0.50 0.10 . . . 0.30 3.00 . . . 0.15 0.50 Remainder
384.0G SC114A A03840 10.50-12.00 1.30 3.00-4.50 0.50 0.10 . . . 0.50 3.00 . . . 0.35 . . . 0.50 Remainder
390.0 SC174A A03900 16.00-18.00 1.30 4.00-5.00 0.10 0.45-0.65 . . . . . . 0.10 0.20 . . . 0.10 0.20 Remainder
B390.0 SC174B A23900 16.00-18.00 1.30 4.00-5.00 0.50 0.45-0.65 . . . 0.10 1.50 0.10 . . . 0.10 0.20 Remainder
392.0 S19 A03920 18.00-20.00 1.50 0.40-0.80 0.20-0.60 0.80-1.20 . . . 0.50 0.50 0.20 0.30 0.15 0.50 Remainder
413.0 S12B A04130 11.00-13.00 2.00 1.00 0.35 0.10 . . . 0.50 0.50 . . . 0.15 . . . 0.25 Remainder
A413.0 S12A A14130 11.00-13.00 1.30 1.00 0.35 0.10 . . . 0.50 0.50 . . . 0.15 . . . 0.25 Remainder
C443.0 S5C A34430 4.50-6.00 2.00 0.60 0.35 0.10 . . . 0.50 0.50 . . . 0.15 . . . 0.25 Remainder
518.0 G8A A05180 0.35 1.80 0.25 0.35 7.50-8.50 . . . 0.15 0.15 . . . 0.15 . . . 0.25 Remainder
A Analysis shall ordinarily be made only for the elements mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is suspected, or indicated in the course
of routine analysis, further analysis shall be made to determine that the total of these other elements are not present in excess of specified limits.
B For purposes of acceptance and rejection, the observed value or calculated value obtained from analysis should be rounded off to the nearest unit in the last right-hand
place of figures, used in expressing the specified limit, in accordance with the rounding procedure prescribed in Section 3 of Practice E 29.
C Limits are in percent maximum unless shown otherwise.
D Alloys 360.0, 380.0, 413.0, C443.0 and 518.0 are suitable for the production of die casting by either the hot-chamber or the cold-chamber process. Die castings of
alloys A360.0, A380.0, 383.0, 384.0 and A413.0 may be made only in cold-chamber machines. ASTM designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275.
ANSI designations were established in accordance with ANSI H35.1. UNS designations were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
E ”Others” includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown as well as unlisted metallic elements. The producer may analyze samples for trace elements not
specified in the registration or specification. However, such analysis is not required and may not cover all metallic “other” elements. Should any analysis by the producer
or the purchaser establish that the aggregate of several “others” elements exceeds the limit of the “Total” the material shall be considered non-conforming.
F The sum of those “others” metallic elements 0.010 percent or more, each expressed to the second decimal before determining the sum.
G With respect to mechanical properties, alloys A380.0, 383.0 and 384.0 are substantially interchangeable.
B 85 – 03
2
4.2.1 Whether chemical analysis reports are required (8.1.1
and Table 1),
4.2.2 Whether additional quality assurance requirements are
required (7.1),
4.2.3 Whether special proof tests or mechanical property
tests are required (Section 9),
4.2.4 Whether there are additional general quality require-
ments for internal soundness (11.2), pressure tightness (11.3),
fillets, ribs and corners (11.4), ejector pins, pin marks, pin flash
and flash removal (11.5), casting flash removal (11.6), surface
finish (11.7), die cast lettering and ornamentation (11.8) or
workmanship (11.10),
4.2.5 Whether source inspection is required (Section 12),
4.2.6 Whether certification is required (Section 14),
4.2.7 Marking for identification (Section 15), and
4.2.8 Whether the material shall be packaged, or marked, or
both, in accordance with MIL-STD-129, Fed. Std. No. 123 or
Practice D 3951 (16.2), and Practices B 660 (16.3).
5. Materials
5.1 Unless otherwise specified, only aluminum alloy con-
forming to the requirements of Specification B 179 or produc-
er’s foundry scrap (identified as being made from alloy
conforming to Specification B 179) shall be used in the
remelting furnace from which molten metal is taken for
pouring directly into castings. Additions of small amounts of
modifiers and grain refining elements or alloys are permitted.
5.1.1 Pure materials, recycled materials, and master alloys
and material not conforming to Specification B 179 may be
used to make alloys conforming to this specification, provided
chemical analysis can be taken and adjusted to conform to
Table 1 prior to pouring any castings.
6. Manufacture
6.1 The producer of the die castings shall supply castings
that can be laid out and machined to the final dimensions
(within the permissible variations specified on the blueprints or
drawings), except when the die is furnished by the purchaser.
7. Quality Assurance
7.1 Responsibility for Inspection—When specified in the
contract or purchase order, the producer or supplier is respon-
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require-
ments specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the
contract or order, the producer or supplier may use his own or
any other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspec-
tion and test requirements specified herein, unless disapproved
by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the right to perform
any of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification.
Quality assurance standards shall be agreed upon between the
producer or supplier and purchaser at the time a contract or
order is placed.
7.2 Lot Definition—An inspection lot shall be defined as
follows:
7.2.1 An inspection lot shall consist of the production from
each die or compound die on each machine for each 24 h
during the first week of normal operation and the production
for each 48 h thereafter of normal operation. Any significant
change in the machine, composition, die or continuity of
operation shall be considered as the start of a new lot. Die
castings inspected by this method shall be so marked or
handled during the finishing operations as not to lose their
identity.
7.2.2 Each die casting of a randomly selected sample shall
be examined to determine conformance to the requirements
with respect to general quality, dimensions, and identification
marking. The producer or supplier may use a system of
statistical quality control for such examinations.
7.3 All testing shall be performed in accordance to appli-
cable ASTM test methods.
8. Chemical Composition
8.1 Limits—The diecastings shall conform to the require-
ments as to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
Conformance shall be determined by the producer by analyzing
samples taken at the time castings are made. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the metal during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
8.1.1 When a chemical analysis is required with a shipment,
it shall be called for in the contract or purchase order.
8.1.2 If the producer’s or supplier’s method of composition
control is acceptable, sampling for chemical analysis may be
waived at the discretion of the purchaser.
8.2 Number of Samples—When required, samples for deter-
mination of chemical composition shall be taken to represent
the following:
8.2.1 A sample shall be taken from each of two representa-
tive castings selected from each defined lot (see 7.2.1).
8.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples from die castings for
determination of chemical composition shall be taken in
accordance with one of the following methods:
8.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
material by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain a prepared sample not
less than 100 g. Sampling shall be in accordance with Practices
E 88 or E 716,or both.
8.3.2 By agreement, an appropriate spectrographic sample
may be prepared at time of manufacture.
8.4 Method of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
cal (Test Methods E 34), or spectrochemical (Test Methods
E 607 and E 1251) methods. Other methods may be used only
when no published ASTM test method is available. In case of
dispute, the methods of analysis shall be agreed upon between
the producer and the purchaser.
9. Mechanical Properties
9.1 Unless specified in the contract or purchase order or
specifically guaranteed by the manufacturer, acceptance of die
castings under these specifications shall not depend on me-
chanical properties determined by tension or impact tests.
Table X2.1 shows typical mechanical properties that may be
expected of test specimens when cast in a separate tensile test
bar die and that conform to the chemical composition specified.
When tension or impact tests are made, the tension test
specimen shown in Fig. 18 of Test Methods E 8 or Fig. 13 of
B 85 – 03
3
Test Methods B 557, and the impact test specimen shown in
Fig. 6 of Test Methods E 23 shall be used.
9.2 When specified in the contract or purchase order, die
castings shall withstand proof tests without failure as defined
by agreement between the purchaser and the producer or
supplier.
10. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
10.1 Permissible variations in dimensions shall be within
the limits specified on the drawings or in the contract or
purchase order.
10.2 Linear Dimensions—Unless otherwise specified on the
drawing or in the contract or purchase order, linear dimension
tolerances shall conform to NADCA Product Specification
Standard S-4A-1-00, Standard Tolerances, or by agreement
between the producer and the supplier, P-4A-1-00, Precision
Tolerances.
10.3 Parting Lines—Unless otherwise specified on the
drawing or in the contract or purchase order, parting line
dimension tolerances shall conform to NADCA Product Speci-
fication Standard S-4A-2-00, Standard Tolerances, or by agree-
ment between the producer and the supplier, P-4A-2-00,
Precision Tolerances.
10.4 Moving Die Components—Unless otherwise specified
on the drawing or in the contract or purchase order, moving die
component dimension tolerances shall conform to NADCA
Product Specification Standard S-4A-3-00, Standard Toler-
ances, or by agreement between the producer and the supplier,
P-4A-3-00, Precision Tolerances.
10.5 Draft—Unless otherwise specified on the drawing or in
the contract or purchase order, draft tolerance dimensions shall
conform to NADCA Product Specification Standard S-4A-4-
00, Standard Tolerances, or by agreement between the pro-
ducer and the supplier, P-4A-4-00, Precision Tolerances.
10.6 Flatness—Unless otherwise specified on the drawing
or in the contract or purchase order, flatness dimensional
tolerances shall conform to NADCA Product Specification
Standard S-4A-5-00, Standard Tolerances, or by agreement
between the producer and the supplier, P-4A-5-00, Precision
Tolerances.
10.7 Cored Holes for Cut Threads—Unless otherwise speci-
fied on the drawing or in the contract or purchase order, the
dimensional tolerances for cored holes for cut threads shall
conform to NADCA Product Specification Standard S-4A-6-
00, Standard Tolerances, or by agreement between the pro-
ducer and the supplier, P-4A-6-00, Precision Tolerances.
10.8 Cored Holes for Pipe Threads—Unless otherwise
specified on the drawing or in the contract or purchase order,
the dimensional tolerances for cored holes for cut threads shall
conform to NADCA Product Specification Standard S-4A-8-
00.
10.9 Cored Holes for Formed Threads—Unless otherwise
specified on the drawing or in the contract or purchase order,
the dimensional tolerances for cored holes for cut threads shall
conform to NADCA Product Specification Standard P-4A-7-
00.
10.10 Machining Stock—Unless otherwise specified on the
drawing or in the contract or purchase order, allowances for
machining stock shall conform to the standard tolerances
detailed in NADCA Product Specification Standard S/P-4-9-
00, or by agreement between the producer and the supplier, the
precision tolerances shown in S/P-4-9-00.
10.11 Dimensional tolerance deviations waived by the pur-
chaser shall be confirmed in writing to the producer or supplier.
11. General Quality
11.1 Imperfections inherent in die castings shall not be
cause for rejection provided it is demonstrated that the die
castings are in accordance with the requirements and standards
agreed upon.
11.2 Internal Soundness—When specified, the soundness of
die castings shall conform to standards or requirements agreed
upon between the producer or supplier and the purchaser. The
number and extent of imperfections shall not exceed those
specified by the purchaser. The standards or requirements may
consist of radiographs in accordance with Reference Radio-
graphs E 505, photographs or sectioned die castings.
11.3 Pressure Tightness—When specified in the contract or
purchase order, the pressure tightness of die castings shall
conform to standards agreed upon between the purchaser and
the producer or supplier, or as prescribed in NADCA Product
Specification Standards for Die Castings G-6-1-00.
11.4 Fillets, Ribs and Corners—Unless otherwise specified
in the contract or purchase order fillets, ribs and corners shall
conform to NADCA Product Specification Standards for Die
Castings G-6-2-00 and G-6-3-00.
11.5 Ejector Pins, Pin Marks, Pin Flash, and Flash
Removal—Unless otherwise specified in the contract or pur-
chase order ejector pns, pin marks, pin flash, and flash removal
shall conform to NADCA Product Specification Standards for
Die Castings G-6-4-00 and G-6-5-00.
11.6 Casting Flash Removal—Unless otherwise specified in
the contract or purchase order casting flash removal shall
conform to NADCA Product Specification Standards for Die
Castings G-6-5-00.
11.7 Surface Finish—When specified in the contract or
purchase order the as-cast surface finish required shall conform
to standards agreed upon between the purchaser and the
producer or supplier, or as prescribed in NADCA Product
Specification Standards for Die Castings G-6-6-00.
11.8 Die Cast Lettering and Ornamentation—Unless other-
wise specified in the contract or purchase order, die cast
lettering and ornamentation shall conform to NADCA Product
Specification Standards for Die Castings G-6-7-00.
11.9 Machining Stock Allowances—Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, die cast machining stock
allowances shall conform to NADCA Product Specification
Standards for Die Castings standard allowances shown in
S/P-4-9-00.
11.10 Workmanship—Die castings shall be of uniform qual-
ity, free of injurious discontinuities that will adversely affect
their serviceability.
12. Source Inspection
12.1 If the purchaser elects to make an inspection of the
casting at the producer’s works, it shall be so stated in the
contract or order.
B 85 – 03
4
12.2 If the purchaser elects to have inspection made at the
producer’s works, the producer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests and
inspection shall be so conducted as not to interfere unneces-
sarily with the operation of the works.
13. Rejection and Retest
13.1 When one or more samples, depending on the ap-
proved sampling plan, fail to meet the requirements of this
specification, the represented lot is subject to rejection except
as otherwise provided in 13.2.
13.2 Lots rejected for failure to meet the requirements of
this specification may be resubmitted for test, provided:
13.2.1 The producer has removed the nonconforming mate-
rial or the producer has reworked the rejected lot as necessary
to correct the deficiencies.
13.3 Individual castings that show injurious imperfections
during subsequent manufacturing operations may be rejected.
Theproducer or supplier shall be responsible only for replace-
ment of the rejected castings to the purchaser. As much of the
rejected original material as possible shall be returned to the
producer or supplier.
14. Certification
14.1 The producer or supplier shall, when called for in the
contract or purchase order, furnish to the purchaser a certificate
of inspection stating that each lot has been sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this specification, and has been
found to meet the requirements specified.
15. Product Marking
15.1 Unless otherwise specified, each casting shall be
marked with the applicable drawing or part number. The
marking shall consist of raised Arabic numerals, and when
applicable capital letters, cast integral. The location of the
identification marking shall be as specified on the applicable
drawing. When the location is not specified on the drawing, the
drawing/part number shall be placed in a location mutually
agreeable to the purchaser and producer. Government applica-
tions shall be marked in accordance with AMS-STD-184.
16. Packaging and Package Marking
16.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified, the die cast-
ings shall be packaged to provide adequate protection during
normal handling and transportation. Each package shall con-
tain only one type of item unless otherwise agreed upon. The
type of packaging and gross weight of containers shall, unless
otherwise agreed upon, be at the producer’s discretion, pro-
vided they are such as to ensure acceptance by common or
other carriers for safe transportation.
16.2 Marking—Each shipping container shall be legibly
marked with the purchase order number, gross and net weights,
and the supplier’s name or trademark. Marking for shipment
shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 or Practice
D 3951 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for Military
agencies.
16.3 Preservation—Material intended for prolonged storage
in unheated locations shall be adequately packed and protected
to avoid deterioration and damage. When specified in the
contract or purchase order, material shall be preserved, pack-
aged, and packed in accordance with the requirements of
Practices B 660. The applicable levels shall be as specified in
the contract or order.
17. Characteristics of Die Casting Alloys
17.1 Table X1.1 shows certain casting and other outstanding
characteristics which are usually considered in selecting a
die-casting alloy for a specific application. The characteristics
are rated from (1) to (5), (1) being the best and (5) being the
least desirable for that attribute. In considering these ratings, it
should be noted that all the alloys have sufficiently good
characteristics to be accepted by users and producers of die
castings. Hence the rating for each characteristic is a relative
measure of that attribute compared to the same attribute in
another alloy.
18. Keywords
18.1 aluminum; die casting
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. BASIS FOR INCLUSION OF PROPERTY LIMITS
A1.1 Limits are established at a level at which a statistical
evaluation of the data indicates that 99 % of the population
obtained from all standard material meets the limit with 95 %
confidence. For the products described, mechanical property
limits for the respective size ranges are based on the analyses
of at least 100 data from standard production material with no
more than ten data from a given lot. All tests are performed in
accordance with the appropriate ASTM test methods. For
informational purposes, refer to “Statistical Aspects of Me-
chanical Property Assurance” in the Related Material section of
the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
B 85 – 03
5
A2. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR INCLUSION OF NEW ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOYS IN THIS
SPECIFICATION
A2.1 Prior to acceptance for inclusion in this specification,
the composition of cast aluminum or aluminum alloy shall be
registered in accordance with ANSI H35.1. The Aluminum
Association13 holds the Secretariat of ANSI H35 Committee
and administers the criteria and procedures for registration.
A2.2 If it is documented that the Aluminum Association
could not or would not register a given composition, an
alternative procedure and the criteria for acceptance shall be as
follows:
A2.2.1 The designation submitted for inclusion does not
utilize the same designation system as described in ANSI
H35.1. A designation not in conflict with other designation
systems or a trade name is acceptable.
A2.2.2 The aluminum or aluminum alloy has been offered
for sale in commercial quantities within the prior twelve
months to at least three identifiable users.
A2.2.3 The complete chemical composition limits are sub-
mitted.
A2.2.4 The composition is, in the judgement of the respon-
sible subcommittee, significantly different from that of any
other aluminum or aluminum alloy already in this specifica-
tion.
A2.2.5 For codification purposes, an alloying element is any
element intentionally added for any purpose other than grain
refinement and for which minimum and maximum limits are
specified. Unalloyed aluminum contains a minimum of
99.00 % aluminum.
A2.2.6 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed to the following decimal places:
Less than 0.001 % 0.000X
0.001 to but less than 0.01 % 0.00X
0.01 to but less than 0.10 %
Unalloyed aluminum made by a refining process 0.0XX
Alloys and unalloyed aluminum not made by a refining
process 0.0X
0.10 through 0.55 % 0.XX
(It is customary to express limits of 0.30 through 0.55 % as
0.X0 or 0.X5)
Over 0.55 % 0.X, X.X, etc.
(Except that combined Si + Fe limits for 99.00 % minimum
aluminum must be expressed as 0.XX or 1.XX)
A2.2.7 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed in the following sequence: Silicon; Iron; Copper;
Manganese; Magnesium; Chromium; Nickel; Zinc (Note
A2.1); Titanium; Other Elements, Each; Other Elements, Total;
Aluminum (Note A2.2).
NOTE A2.1—Additional specified elements having limits are inserted in
alphabetical order of their chemical symbols between zinc and titanium, or
are specified in footnotes.
NOTE A2.2—Aluminum is specified asminimumfor unalloyed alumi-
num and as aremainderfor aluminum alloys.
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. CHARACTERISTICS
X1.1 Table X1.1 shows certain casting and other outstand-
ing characteristics, which are usually considered in selecting a
die casting alloy for a specific application.
13 The Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006.
B 85 – 03
6
X2. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
X2.1 The data in Table X2.1 do not constitute a part of this
specification because the data only indicates mechanical prop-
erties that may be expected of test specimens when cast in a
separate tensile test bar die and that conform to the chemical
composition specified. Different machines and dies continue to
be necessary for die castings and test bars. Comparison
between static breakdown or proof tests and the mechanical
properties of separately die cast test bars will show that test
bars made in a different machine in a different die have no
correlation with the die casting other than a common chemical
TABLE X1.1 Die Casting and Other Characteristics
NOTE 1—Rating System—The various alloys are rated 1 to 5 according to the positive to negative qualities in the listed categories. A rating of 1 gives
the best performance, 5 the poorest performance. No one alloy is best in all categories. A rating of 5 in any one or more categories does not rule an alloy
out of commercial usefulness if its other attributes are especially favorable. However, ratings of 5 may present manufacturing difficulties.
Designation
UNSA
Die Casting Characteristics Other CharacteristicsB
Strength
at Ele-
vated
Tempera-
turesC
AA No.
(ANSI)A
(old)
ASTMA
Approxi-
mate Melt-
ing Temper-
ature
Range,° F (°C)
Resistance
to Hot
CrackingD
Pressure
Tightness
Die Fill-
ing Ca-
pacityE
Anti-Sol-
dering to
the DieF
Resist-
ance to
Corro-
sionG
Machin-
ingH
Polish-
ingIElectro-
platingJ
Anodizing
(Appear-
ance)K
Chemical
Oxide
Coating
(Protec-
tion)L
360.0 SG100B A03600 1035–1105 (557-596) 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 1
A360.0 SG100A A13600 1035–1105 (557–596) 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 1
380.0 SC84B A03800 1000–1100 (538-593) 2 2 2 1 4 3 3 1 3 4 3
A380.0 SC84A A13800 1000–1100 (538-593) 2 2 2 1 4 3 3 1 3 4 3
383.0 SC102A A03830 960–1080 (516-582) 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 4 2
384.0 SC114A A03840 960–1080 (516-582) 2 2 1 2 5 3 3 2 4 5 2
390.0 SC174A A03900 945–1200 (507-649) 4 4 1 2 3 5 5 3 5 5 3
B390.0 SC174B A23900 950–1200 (510-649) 4 4 1 2 3 5 5 3 5 5 3
392.0 S19 A03920 1025–1245 (552-674) 4 3 1 2 2 5 5 3 5 5 3
413.0 S12B A04130 1065–1080 (574-582) 1 1 1 1 2 4 5 3 5 3 3
A413.0 S12A A14130 1065–1080 (574-582) 1 1 1 1 2 4 5 3 5 3 3
C443.0 S5C A34430 1065–1170 (574-632) 3 3 4 4 2 5 4 2 2 2 5
518.0 G8A A05180 995–1150 (535-621) 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 4
A ASTM designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275. ANSI designations were established in accordance with ANSI H35.1. UNS designations were
established in accordance with Practice E 527.
B Die castings are not usually solution heat treated. Low temperature aging treatments may be used for stress relief or dimensional stability. Die castings are not generally
gas or arc welded or brazed.
C Rating based on tensile and yield strengths at temperature up to 500°F (260°C), after prolonged heating at testing temperature.
D Ability of alloy to withstand stresses from contraction while cooling through hot-short or brittle temperature range.
E Ability of molten alloy to flow readily in die and fill thin sections.
F Ability of molten alloy to flow without sticking to the die surfaces. Ratings given for antisoldering are based on nominal iron compositions of approximately 1.
G Based on resistance of alloy in standard type salt spray test.
H Composite rating based on ease of cutting, chip characteristics, quality of finish and tool life.
I Composite rating based on ease and speed of polishing and quality of finish provided by typical polishing procedure.
J Ability of the alloy to take and hold an electroplate applied by present standard methods.
K Rated on lightness of color, brightness and uniformity of clear anodized coating applied in sulphuric acid electrolyte. Generally aluminum die castings are unsuitable
for light color anodizing where pleasing appearance is required.
L Rated on combined resistance of coating and base alloy to corrosion.
TABLE X2.1 Typical Mechanical Properties Test Specimens A
Alloy
UNSB
Tensile
Strength, ksi
(MPa)
Yield Strength
(0.2 % Offset),
ksi (MPa)
Elongation in
2 in. or 50
mm, %
Shear
Strength,
ksi (MPa)
Fatigue Strength
(R. R. Moore
Specimen),
500,000,000
cycles, ksi (MPa)
ANSIA ASTMB
360.0 SG100B A03600 44(300) 25(170) 2.5 28(190) 20(140)
A360.0 SG100A A13600 46(320) 24(170) 3.5 26(180) 18(120)
380.0 SC84B A03800 46(320) 23(160) 2.5 28(190) 20(140)
A380.0 SC84A A13800 47(320) 23(160) 3.5 27(190) 20(140)
383.0 SC102A A03830 45(310) 22(150) 3.5 ... ...
384.0 SC114A A03840 48(330) 24(170) 2.5 29(200) 20(140)
390.0 SC174A A03900 40.5(280) 35.0(240) <1 ... ...
B390.0 SC174B A23900 46.0(320) 36.0(250) <1 ... ...
392.0 S19 A03920 42.0(290) 39.0(270) <1 ... ...
413.0 S12B A04130 43(300) 21(140) 2.5 25(170) 19(130)
A413.0 S12A A14130 42(290) 19(130) 3.5 25(170) 19(130)
C443.0 S5C A34430 33(230) 14(100) 9.0 19(130) 17(120)
518.0 G8A A05180 45(310) 28(190) 5 29(200) 20(140)
A See Appendix X3 for explanation of SI unit MPa.
B ASTM designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275. ANSI designations were established in accordance with ANSI H35.1. UNS designations were
established in accordance with Practice E 527.
B 85 – 03
7
composition. It should be thoroughly understood that the data
in Table X2.1 represent die-cast test specimens and not
specimens cut from commercial die-cast parts. For this reason,
it is considered that the only practical method for mechanical
property control is proof testing the whole die casting.
X3. METRIC EQUIVALENTS
X3.1 The SI unit for strength properties (MPa) is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 85-99)
that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved April 2003)
(1) Rewrite of the entire standard.
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
B 85 – 03
8
Designation: B 90/B 90M – 98
Standard Specification for
Magnesium-Alloy Sheet and Plate 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 90/B 90M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope *
1.1 This specification covers magnesium alloys in sheet and
plate form designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to
be regarded separately as standards. The SI units are shown in
brackets or in separate tables or columns. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
must be used independent of the other. Combining values from
the two systems may result in nonconformance with the
specification.
1.3 Unless the order specifies the “M” specification desig-
nation, the material shall be furnished to the inch-pound units.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 296 Practice for Temper Designations of Magnesium
Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products2
B 557M Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium Alloy Products [Metric]2
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
MagnesiumProducts2
B 661 Practice for Heat Treatment of Magnesium Alloys2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specification3
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys4
E 55 Practice for SamplingWrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition4
2.3 Federal Standards:5
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
Fed. Std. No. 184 Identification Marking of Aluminum,
Magnesium and Titanium
2.4 Military Standards:5
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-M-3171 Magnesium Alloy, Processes for Pretreatment
and Prevention of Corrosion on
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 plate—a rolled product rectangular in cross section
and form, of thickness 0.250 in., or more, [over 6.30 mm],
either sheared or sawed edges.
3.1.2 sheet—a rolled product rectangular in cross section
and form, of thickness of 0.006 through 0.249 in. [over 0.15
through 6.30 mm] with sheared, slit, or sawed edges.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for sheet and plate to this specification shall
include the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity in pieces, pounds, or [kilograms]
4.1.2 Alloy (Section 5 and Table 1),
4.1.3 Temper (Section 6 and Table 2),
4.1.4 Thickness, width, and length,
4.1.5 Surface treatment (see 8.2),
4.1.6 Whether inspection is required at the manufacturer’s
works (see 13.1), and
4.1.7 Whether certification of the material by the vendor is
required (Section 15).
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The sheet and plate shall conform to the chemical
requirements in Table 1.
6. Tensile Properties
6.1 The sheet and plate shall conform to the tensile require-
ments in Table 2 [Table 3] unless other agreement is made
between seller and purchaser. Properties for sizes and tempers
not shown in Table 2 [Table 3] shall be as agreed upon by seller
and purchaser.
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-7 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 1998. Published March 1999. Originally
published as B 90 – 32 T. Last previous edition B 90 – 93.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
5 Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
100 Barr Harbor Dr., West Conshohocken, PA 19428
Reprinted from the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Copyright ASTM
7. Dimensional Tolerances
7.1 Variations from the specified thickness shall not exceed
the amounts prescribed in Table 4 [Table 5].
7.2 Variations from the specified width shall not exceed the
amounts prescribed in Table 6 [Table 7], Table 8 [Table 9], and
Table 10 [Table 11].
7.3 Variations from the specified length shall not exceed the
amounts prescribed in Table 12 [Table 13].
7.4 Squareness of sheet and plate shall conform to the
requirements of Table 14 [Table 15].
7.5 Flatness of sheet and plate shall conform to the require-
ments of Table 16 [Table 17].
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Limits A
NOTE 1—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is
suspected or indicated in amounts greater than the specified limits, further analysis shall be made to determine that these elements are not present inexcess
of the specified limits.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value
obtained from analysis should be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
Composition %A
Al Mn R.E. Zn Zr Ca Cu Fe Ni Si Each Total Mg
AZ31B 2.5-3.5 0.20-1.0 . . . 0.6-1.4 . . . 0.04 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.10 . . . 0.30 Remainder
A Limits are in weight percent maximum unless shown as a range.
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded to the
nearest 0.1 ksi, and each value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 %, both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
Alloy and Temper Specified Thickness, in. Tensile Strength, min, ksi
Yield Strength (0.2 %
Offset), min, ksi
Elongation in 2 in.,
or 4 3 dia min, %
AZ31B-O 0.016–0.500 32.0A . . . 12
0.501–2.000 32.0A . . . 10
2.001–3.000 32.0A . . . 9
AZ31B-H24 0.016–0.249 39.0 29.0 6
0.250–0.374 38.0 26.0 8
0.375–0.500 37.0 24.0 8
0.501–1.000 36.0 22.0 8
1.001–2.000 34.0 20.0 8
2.001–3.000 34.0 18.0 8
AZ31B-H26 0.250–0.374 39.0 27.0 6
0.375–0.500 38.0 26.0 6
0.501–0.750 37.0 25.0 6
0.751–1.000 37.0 23.0 6
1.001–1.500 35.0 22.0 6
1.501–2.000 35.0 21.0 6
A Tensile strength shall be 40.0 ksi max.
TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements [Metric] A
Alloy and
Temper
Specified
Thickness, mm
Tensile
Strength, MPaB
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset), MPa
Elongation, min %
Over Through Min Max Min in 50 mmC
in 5 3 dia
(5.65 V A)
AZ31B-O 0.40 12.50 221 275 . . . 12 . . .
12.50 50.00 221 275 . . . . . . 9
50.00 80.00 221 275 . . . . . . 8
AZ31B-H24 0.40 6.30 269 . . . 200 6 . . .
6.30 10.00 262 . . . 179 8 . . .
10.00 12.50 255 . . . 165 8 . . .
12.50 25.00 248 . . . 152 . . . 7
25.00 50.00 234 . . . 138 . . . 7
50.00 80.00 234 . . . 124 . . . 7
AZ31B-H26 6.30 10.00 269 . . . 186 6 . . .
10.00 12.50 262 . . . 179 6 . . .
12.50 20.00 255 . . . 172 . . . 5
20.00 25.00 255 . . . 159 . . . 5
25.00 40.00 241 . . . 152 . . . 5
40.00 50.00 241 . . . 148 . . . 5
A The basis for establishment of mechanical property limits as shown in Appendix X1.
B To determine conformance to this specification each value for tensile strength shall be rounded to the nearest 1 MPa and each value for elongation to the nearest 0.5 %,
both in accordance with the rounding-off method of Practice E 29.
C Elongation in 50 mm apply for thicknesses up through 12.50 mm and in 5 3 diameter (5.65 V A) for thicknesses over 12.50 mm where A is the cross-sectional area
of the specimen.
B 90/B 90M
2
7.6 Lateral bow of sheet and plate shall conform to the requirements of Table 18 [Table 19] and Table 20 [Table 21].
TABLE 4 Thickness Tolerances for Magnesium Flat and Coiled Sheet and Plate A
Thickness tolerance, in. 6
Specified
Thickness, in.
Specified
Widths up to
18, incl
Over 18
through 36
Over 36
through 48
Over 48
through 54
Over 54
through 60
Over 60
through 66
Over 66
through 72
0.016–0.028 0.0015 0.002 0.0025 0.0035 0.004 0.004 0.004
0.029–0.036 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005
0.037–0.045 0.002 0.0025 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005
0.046–0.068 0.0025 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.006
0.069–0.076 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.006
0.077–0.096 0.0035 0.0035 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.006
0.097–0.108 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.007 0.007 0.007
0.109–0.125 0.0045 0.0045 0.005 0.005 0.007 0.007 0.007
0.126–0.140 0.0045 0.0045 0.005 0.005 0.007 0.010 0.012
0.141–0.172 0.006 0.006 0.008 0.008 0.009 0.012 0.014
0.173–0.203 0.007 0.007 0.010 0.010 0.011 0.014 0.016
0.204–0.249 0.009 0.009 0.011 0.011 0.013 0.016 0.018
0.250–0.320 0.013 0.013 0.013 0.013 0.015 0.018 0.020
0.321–0.438 0.019 0.019 0.019 0.019 0.020 0.020 0.023
0.439–0.625 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
0.626–0.875 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
0.876–1.125 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
1.126–1.375 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
1.376–1.625 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
1.626–1.875 0.052 0.052 0.052 0.052 0.052 0.052 0.052
1.876–2.250 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
2.251–2.750 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075
2.751–3.000 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090
3.001–4.0000.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
4.001–5.000 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125
5.001–6.000 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135
A When a dimension tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that applying to the mean of maximum and
minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
TABLE 5 Thickness Tolerances for Magnesium Flat and Coiled Sheet and Plate [Metric] A
Specified Thickness,
mm
Over Through
Thickness tolerance, mm6
Specified
Widths up
to 450,
incl.
Over
450
Through
900
Over
900
Through
1200
Over
1200
Through
1350
Over
1350
Through
1500
Over
1500
Through
1650
Over
1650
Through
1850
0.40–0.70 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.10 0.10 0.10
0.70–0.90 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.10 0.12 0.12 0.12
0.90–1.15 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.10 0.12 0.12 0.12
1.15–1.70 0.06 0.07 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.15
1.70–1.90 0.07 0.07 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.15
1.90–2.40 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.15
2.40–2.76 0.10 0.10 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.18
2.76–3.17 0.11 0.11 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.18 0.18
3.17–3.55 0.11 0.11 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.30
3.55–4.35 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.22 0.30 0.35
4.35–5.15 0.18 0.18 0.25 0.25 0.27 0.35 0.40
5.15–6.30 0.23 0.23 0.28 0.27 0.33 0.40 0.45
6.30–8.00 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.38 0.45 0.50
8.00–11.10 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.50 0.50 0.58
11.10–15.75 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63
15.75–22.20 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
22.20–28.50 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88
28.50–34.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
34.90–41.25 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14
41.25–47.60 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32
47.60–57.15 1.52 1.52 1.52 1.52 1.52 1.52 1.52
57.15–69.85 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90
69.85–76.20 2.28 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25
76.20–100.00 2.79 2.75 2.75 2.75 2.75 2.75 2.75
100.00–125.00 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15
125.00–150.00 3.40 3.40 3.40 3.40 3.40 3.40 3.40
A When a dimension tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that applying to the mean of maximum and
minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
B 90/B 90M
3
8. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
8.1 All sheet and plate shall be commercially flat and free of
buckles, shall be free of injurious surface defects, and have a
workmanlike finish.
8.2 The sheet or plate shall be supplied in the finish
specified by the purchaser. One of the following finishes should
be specified:
8.2.1 Mill finish,
8.2.2 Mill finish and oiled,
8.2.3 Chrome pickled, or
8.2.4 Chrome pickled and oiled.
9. Sampling for Chemical Analysis
9.1 Ingot—At least one sample shall be taken for each
group of ingots of the same alloy poured from the same source
TABLE 6 Width Tolerances—Magnesium Flat Sheet A
Specified
Thickness, in.
Width tolerances, in. 6
Specified
Widths up
through 4
Over 4
through
18
Over 18
through
36
Over 36
through
54
Over 54
through
72
0.016–0.064 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32
0.065–0.102 1/16 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32
0.103–0.249 1/8 3/32 1/8 3/16 3/16
A 0.016–0.099 sheared to above tolerances.
0.100–0.249 sawed or sheared to above tolerances.
TABLE 7 Width Tolerances, Magnesium Flat Sheet [Metric] A
Specified
Thickness, mm
Over Through
Width tolerances, mm6
Specified
Widths up
Through
100
Over
100
Through
450
Over
450
Through
900
Over
900
Through
1350
Over
1350
Through
1850
0.40–1.60 1.0 1.5 2.5 3 4
1.60–2.60 1.5 1.5 2.5 3 4
2.60–6.30 3.0 2.5 3.0 5 5
A Over 0.40 through 2.50 sheared to above tolerances. Over 2.50 through 6.30
sawed or sheared to above tolerances.
TABLE 8 Width and Length Tolerances—Magnesium Sawed
Flat Plate
Specified
Thickness, in.
Tolerances, in. 6 specified widthA or length, in.
Up
through 10
Over 10
through 48
Over 48
through 84
Over 84
0.250–6.000 3/32 3/16 1/4 5/16
A Maximum width 5 72 in.
TABLE 9 Width and Length Tolerances, Magnesium Sawed Flat
Plate [Metric]
Specified
Thickness, mm
Over Through
Tolerances, mm 6 specified widthA or length
Up
Through
250
Over
250
Through
1200
Over
1200
Through
2000
Over
2000
6.30–150.0 2.5 5 6.5 8
A Maximum width 5 1850 mm.
TABLE 10 Width Tolerances—Magnesium Coiled Sheet
Specified
Thickness, in.
Width Tolerances, in. 6
Specified
Widths up
through 6
Over 6
through
12
Over 12
through
24
Over 24
through
48
Over 48
through
60
0.016–0.125 0.010 0.016 1/32 3/64 1/16
TABLE 11 Width Tolerances, Magnesium Coiled Sheet [Metric]
Specified
Thickness, mm
Over Through
Width Tolerances, mm6
Specified
Widths Up
Through
150
Over
150
Through
300
Over
300
Through
600
Over
600
Through
1200
Over
1200
Through
1525
0.40–3.10 0.25 0.5 1 1 1.5
TABLE 12 Length Tolerances—Magnesium Sheet A
Specified
Thickness, in.
Length tolerances, in. 6
Specified
Lengths up
through 18
Over 18
through
48
Over 48
through
120
Over 120
through
180
Over 180
through
540
0.016–0.249 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32 1/4
A 0.016–0.099 sheared to above tolerances.
0.100–0.249 sawed or sheared to above tolerances.
TABLE 13 Length Tolerances-Magnesium Sheet [Metric] A
Specified
Thickness, mm
Over Through
Length tolerance, mm6
Specified
Lengths up
Through
450
Over
450
Through
1200
Over
1200
Through
3000
Over
3000
Through
4550
Over
4550
Through
14,000
0.40–6.30 1.5 3 3 4 7
A Over 0.40 through 2.50 sheared to above tolerances. Over 2.50 through 6.30
sawed or sheared to above tolerances.
TABLE 14 Squareness Tolerances—Magnesium Sheet and Plate
Specified Width,A ft
Up through 3 Over 3
Allowable Difference in Length of Diagonals, in.B
Specified Length, ft Maximum Difference Between AA and BB
Up through 12 3/32 3 width, ft 5/64 3 width, ft
Over 12 9/64 3 width, ft 7/64 3 width, ft
A If specified width is other than an exact multiple of 12 in., tolerance is
determined by using the next largest exact multiple. For example, if specified width
is 53 in. and specified length is 72 in. the tolerance is 5/64 in. 3 5 5 25/64 in. This
result is then rounded to 7/16 in. in accordance with next footnote.
B Use values for calculating only. Round result upward to nearest 1/16 in.
TABLE 15 Squareness Tolerances, Magnesium Sheet and Plate
[Metric]
Up through 1000 Over 1000
Specified Length, mm Up through 1000 Over 1000
Up through 3500 0.8 3 each 100 mmA 0.7 3 each 100 mmA
Over 3500 1.2 3 each 100 mmA 1.0 3 each 100 mmA
A Above figures are for each 100 mm segment of width. If specified width is other
than an exact multiple of 100 mm, tolerance is determined by using the next largest
exact multiple. For example, if specified width is 750 mm and specified length is
2800 mm the tolerance is 0.8 mm 3 8 5 6.4 mm. This result, if not a whole mm,
is rounded upward to the nearest mm.
B 90/B 90M
4
of molten metal and analyzed to determine conformance to
Table 1. Ingots not conforming shall be rejected.
9.2 Finished Product—Unless compliance is established by
9.1, sampling of the finished product shall be according to
Method E 55. One sample shall be taken for 4000 lb [1815 kg]
or less of material comprising the lot, except that not more than
one analysis shall be required per piece.
10. Sampling for Tensile Properties
10.1 Number of Tests—One tension test specimen shall be
taken from a sheet representing 1000 lb [455 kg] sheet or from
a plate representing each 2000 lb [905 kg] of plate of the same
alloy, temper, and thickness in the shipment or such other
quantity as may be agreed upon by the seller and purchaser.
10.2 Location of Specimens—Tension test specimens shall
be taken parallel to the direction of rolling. The specimen shall
be taken midway between the two plate surfaces for plate in
thicknesses of 0.500 through 1.500 in. [12.50 though 40 mm]
and midway between the center and the surface of plate over
1.500 in. [40 mm] in thickness.
10.3 Types of Specimens—For sheet and plate less than
0.500 in. [12.50 mm] thick, the standard sheet-type specimen
shown in Fig. 6 or for plate 0.500 in. [12.5 mm] or over those
in Fig. 8 of Test Methods B 557 [Test B 557M] shall be used.
If it is necessary to use specimenssmaller than the standard
specimens, they shall have dimensions proportional to those of
Fig. 8 but not less than the following dimensions: reduced
section,1⁄4-in. [41.25 mm] diameter by 1-in. [20.00 mm] gage
length; grip ends,3⁄8-in. [9.5 mm] diameter; total length, 23⁄8in.
[60.3 mm] with shouldered ends, 3 in. [76.2 mm] with threaded
ends, and 4 in. [101.6 mm] if tested with plain cylindrical ends.
If material less than3⁄4 in. [19.0 mm] in width is tested in full
section because the specimens in Fig. 9 cannot be used, the
elongation shall not be determined.
11. Methods of Chemical Analysis
11.1 Any suitable method of chemical analysis may be used.
In case of dispute, the analysis shall be made by methods given
in Methods E 35 or any other standard methods of analysis
approved by ASTM unless some other method is agreed upon.
12. Methods of Tension Testing
12.1 Tension Tests—The tension tests shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods B 557 [B 557M].
NOTE 1—The values obtained for the tensile properties covered by this
specification are not seriously affected by variations in speed of testing. A
considerable range of testing speed is permissible; however, the rate of
stressing to the yield strength should not exceed 100 ksi/min [690 MPa],
and above the yield strength, the movement per minute of the head under
load should not exceed 0.5 in./in. [mm/mm] of gage length (or distance
TABLE 16 Flatness Tolerances—Magnesium Flat Sheet and Plate
Specified
Thickness, in.
Maximum Variation from Flat,A in.
AZ31B (-0 and
-H24 tempers)
AZ31B (-H26
temper)
HK31A
and
HM21A
(all tempers)
In any
1 ftB
In any
3 ftB
In any
1 ftB
In any
3 ftB
In any 6
ft or less
Under 0.126 commercially flat
0.126–0.250 0.020 0.030 0.020 0.030 . . .
0.251–0.500 0.024 0.036 0.025 0.038 0.250
0.501–1.000 0.030 0.045 0.050 0.075 0.250
1.001–2.000 0.040 0.060 0.050 0.075 0.250
A As measured with the plate resting on a flat surface, concave side upward,
using a straightedge and a feeler gage, dial gage, or scale.
B Standard measurement is on the 3-ft basis. Widths and lengths less than 3 ft,
but more than 1 ft, have tolerances proportionately less than those for 3 ft, but not
smaller than for any 1 ft. Widths and lengths less than 1 ft have tolerances
proportionately less than those for any 1 ft.
TABLE 17 Flatness Tolerances, Magnesium Flat Sheet and Plate
[Metric]
Specified
Thickness, mm
Over Through
Maximum Variation from FlatA mm
AZ31B
(−O and H24
Tempers)
AZ31B
(−H26 Temper)
HK31A
and
HM21A
(all
Tempers)
In Any
300
mmB
In Any
900
mmB
In Any
300
mmB
In Any
900
mmB
In Any
1850 mm
or Less
0–3.20 . . .
3.20–6.30 0.50 0.75 0.50 0.75 6.35
6.30–12.50 0.60 0.90 0.63 0.95 6.35
12.50–25.00 0.75 1.10 1.25 1.90 6.35
25.00–50.00 1.00 1.50 1.25 1.90 6.35
A As measured with the plate resting on a flat surface, concave side upward,
using a straightedge and a feeler gage, dial gage, or scale.
B Standard measurement is on the 900 mm basis. Widths and lengths less than
900 mm but more than 300 mm have tolerances proportionately less than those for
900 mm, but not smaller than for any 300 mm. Widths and lengths less than 300
mm have tolerances proportionately less than those for any 300 mm.
TABLE 18 Lateral Bow Tolerances—Magnesium Coiled Sheet
Lateral Bow Tolerance, in.
Specified
Thickness, in.
Specified
Length
through
30
Over 30
through
60
Over 60
through
90
Over 90
through
120
0.016–0.125 1/16 1/4 1/2 1
TABLE 19 Lateral Bow Tolerances, Magnesium Coiled Sheet
[Metric]
Specified Length—mm
Specified
Thickness, mm
Over Through
Specified
Length
Through
750
Over
750
Through
1500
Over
1500
Through
2250
Over
2250
Through
3000
0.40–3.20 1.55 6 13 25
B 90/B 90M
5
between grips for specimens not having reduced sections). Care must be
exercised, especially when making yield strength determinations, that the
speed of testing does not exceed the ability of the strain and load-
indicating equipment to function satisfactorily.
12.2 Retests—If any tension specimen fails to conform to
the requirements prescribed in Table 2 [Table 3], two additional
specimens shall be selected and tested from other sheet or plate
in the lot. If either of these specimens fails to conform to the
applicable requirements, the material may be rejected. If,
however, the failure of the specimens to conform to the
requirements is the result of an inadequate thermal treatment,
the material may be reheat treated and resampled in accordance
with Section 9. Only one such reworking of the material shall
be permitted.
13. Inspection
13.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect
or witness the inspection of material prior to shipment, such
agreement shall be made by the purchaser and producer as part
of the purchase contract.
13.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and
testing is agreed upon, the producer shall afford the purchaser’s
representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the
material meets the requirements of this specification. Inspec-
tion and tests shall be conducted so there is no unnecessary
interference with the producer’s operations.
14. Rejection
14.1 Material that fails to conform to this specification may
be rejected, and if rejected, the producer’s responsibility shall
be limited to replacing the rejected material. The full weight of
the rejected material shall be returned to the manufacturer.
15. Certification
15.1 When agreed in writing by the purchaser and seller, the
seller shall certify that the material has been sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the speci-
fication. Each certificate so furnished shall be signed by an
authorized agent of the producer or seller.
16. Packaging and Package Marking
16.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packaging and gross weight of individual containers
shall be left to the discretion of the producer unless otherwise
agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers shall be so
selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical equip-
ment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each package or
container shall contain only one size, alloy or condition of
material when packed for shipment unless otherwise agreed
upon.
16.2 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, size of material, specification number,
alloy and condition, gross and net weights, and name of the
producer.
16.3 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
16.4 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Practice B 660. The applicable
levels shall be as specified in the contract or order. Marking for
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
TABLE 20 Lateral Bow Tolerances—Magnesium Flat Sheet and Plate
Specified
Width, in.
Specified
Thickness, in.
Allowable Deviation of a Side Edge from a Straight Line
Specified Length, in.
Through
30
Over 30
through
60
Over 60
through
90
Over 90
through
120
Over 120
through
150
Over 150
through
180
Over 180
through
210
Over 210
through
240
Tolerance, in.
Under 4 0.016–0.125 1/16 1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 2 3 4
4–34.99 0.016–0.249 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 1 1 1/2 2
35–72 0.016–0.249 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 5/16 7/16 9/16
Under 10.01 0.250–6.000 1/16 1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 2 3 4
10.01–18 0.250–6.000 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 13/32 19/32 25/32 1
Over 18 0.250–6.000 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 5/16 7/16 9/16
TABLE 21 Lateral Bow Tolerances, Magnesium Flat Sheet and Plate [Metric]
Allowable Deviation of a Side Edge from a Straight Line, mm
Specified Width Specified Specified Length, mm
mm Thickness, mm Through Over Over Over Over Over Over Over
Over Through Over Through 750 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4550 5250
Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
1500 22503000 3750 4550 5250 6000
0 100 0.40 3.20 1.55 6.35 12.50 25.00 38.00 50.00 75.00 100.00
100 900 3.20 6.30 0.75 1.50 2.30 3.10 4.75 25.00 38.00 50.00
900 3.20 6.30 0.75 1.50 2.30 3.10 4.75 7.90 11.00 14.25
0 250 6.30 150 1.50 6.35 12.50 25.00 38.00 50.00 75.00 100.00
250 450 6.30 150 0.75 1.50 3.10 6.35 10.25 15.00 19.75 25.00
450 6.30 150 0.75 1.50 2.30 3.10 4.75 7.90 11.00 14.25
B 90/B 90M
6
No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for military
agencies.
16.5 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be marked in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 184.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. EXPLANATORY NOTES
X1.1 General Information
X1.1.1 Alloy AZ31B is a general-purpose alloy with good
weldability, high strength, and the best cold formability.
X1.2 Specific Gravity
X1.2.1 All of the alloys have a specific gravity of about 1.8.
X1.3 Protection
X1.3.1 Either the chrome pickle or the oil finish affords a
measurable protection against tarnish and corrosion during
shipment and storage of the sheet. The oil finish is frequently
preferred by purchasers intending to perform forming or
drawing operations on the sheet or plate. If desired, MIL-M-
3171 can be used for the chrome pickle.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
This section identifies the location of changes that have been incorporated since the last issue.
(1) Alloys AZ31C, HK31A, HM21A, LA141A, and ZE10A
were deleted from the standard.
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.
TABLE X1.1 Unit Deformation Values [includes Metric]
NOTE 1—The yield strength of magnesium-base alloys is defined as the
stress at which the stress-strain curve deviates 0.2 % from the modulus
line. It may be determined by the “Offset Method” or the “Extension-
Under-Load Method” (the latter is often referred to as the “Approximate
MethodWithout the Stress-Strain Diagram”) as described in Test Methods
B 557 [B 557M]. In case of dispute, the “Offset Method” shall be used.
NOTE 2—The unit deformation values given in Table X1.1 for use with
the “Extension-Under-Load Method” are based on a modulus of elasticity,
E5 6,500,000 psi [4.48 GPa].
Alloy and Temper
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi (MPa)
Unit Defor-
mation, in./in.
(mm/mm) of
gage length
AZ31B-H24 29.0 (200) 0.0065
26.0 (179) 0.0060
24.0 (165) 0.0057
22.0 (152) 0.0054
20.0 (138) 0.0051
18.0 (124) 0.0048
AZ31B-H26 27.0 (186) 0.0062
26.0 (179) 0.0060
25.0 (172) 0.0058
23.0 (159) 0.0055
22.0 (152) 0.0054
21.0 (145) 0.0052
B 90/B 90M
7
Designation: B 91 – 97 (Reapproved 2004)
Standard Specification for
Magnesium-Alloy Forgings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 91; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers magnesium alloy forgings
designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are the standard.
The SI values in parentheses are provided for information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:2
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition
2.3 Federal Standards:
No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)3
No. 184 Identification Marking of Aluminum, Magnesium,
and Titanium.
2.4 Military Standards:
MIL-M-3171 Magnesium Alloy, Processes for Pretreatment
and Prevention of Corrosion on
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 forging—a metal part worked to a predetermined
shape by one or more such processes as hammering, upsetting,
pressing, or rolling.
3.1.2 die forging—a forging formed to the required shape
and size by working in impression dies.
3.1.3 hammer forging—a forging produced by repeated
blows in a forging hammer.
3.1.4 hand forging—a forging worked between flat or sim-
ply shaped dies by repeated strokes or blows and manipulation
of the piece.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for forgings under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each forging,
4.1.2 Alloy (Section 6 and Table 1),
4.1.3 Temper (Section 7 and Table 2),
4.1.4 Drawing showing dimensions of all die forgings and
for all hand forgings not simple disks, rounds, squares, or
rectangles (the amount of stock left for machine finish should
be indicated),
4.1.5 Surface treatment (see 9.1),
4.1.6 Whether inspection is required at the manufacturer’s
works (see 10.1),
4.1.7 Special inspection requirements (see 10.2),
4.1.8 Whether certification is required (see 12.1), and
4.1.9 Whether marking for identification is required (see
13.1).
5. Quality Assurance
5.1 The manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and tests required by this specification,
prior to shipment of the material.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 Limits—The material shall conform to the chemical
composition limits prescribed in Table 1. The manufacturer
shall determine conformance by analyzing samples taken when
the ingots are poured, or by analyzing samples taken from the
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved June 1, 2004. Published June 2004. Originally
approved in 1932. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 91 – 97.
2 For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. ForAnnual Book of ASTM
Standardsvolume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3 Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.
1
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
finished or semi-finished product. If the manufacturer has
determined the chemical composition during the course of
manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and analyze the
finished product.
6.2 Number of Samples—The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
6.2.1When samples are taken at the time the ingots are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
ingots poured simultaneously from the same source of molten
metal.
6.2.2 When samples are taken from the finished or semi-
finished product, a sample shall be taken to represent each
2000 lb (905 kg), or fraction thereof, in the shipment, except
that not more than one sample shall be required per piece.
6.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples for determination of
chemical composition shall be taken in accordance with one of
the following methods:
6.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
material by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain a weight of prepared
sample not less than 75 g. Sampling shall be in accordance
with Practice E 55.
6.3.2 Samples for spectrochemical or other methods of
analysis shall be taken by methods suitable for the form of
material being analyzed and the type of analytical method
used.
6.4 Methods of Chemical Analysis—Any suitable method of
chemical analysis may be used. In case of dispute, the analysis
shall be made by methods given in Test Methods E 35 or any
other standard methods of analysis approved by ASTM unless
some other method is agreed upon.
7. Tensile Properties
7.1 Limits—The forgings shall conform to the tensile prop-
erties prescribed in Table 2.
7.2 Number of Specimens—One tension test specimen shall
be taken to represent each 1000 lb (455 kg) or fraction thereof
of each part number in the shipment or inspection lot.
7.2.1 When specified, a grain flow pattern and tensile-
property survey shall be made on a forging representative of
the first production parts (see 7.3.1). It shall be repeated after
any major change in forging technique.
7.3 Test Specimens—Tension test specimens shall be taken
from a forging or from a separately forged coupon made from
material representative of the forgings, in such a manner that
the longitudinal axis of the specimen is parallel to the direction
of maximum flow of the metal in the forging. The specimens
shall be machined to the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 8
of Test Methods B 557 or in the case of thin material may be
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Limits A,B
NOTE 1—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is
suspected or indicated in amounts greater than the specified limits, further analysis shall be made to determine that these elements are not present inexcess
of the specified limits.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table. For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value
obtained from analysis should be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
Composition, %
Element
Alloy AZ31B
(UNS No.
M11311)
Alloy AZ61A
(UNS No.
M11610)
Alloy AZ80A
(UNS No.
M11800)
Alloy ZK60A
(UNS No.
M16600)
Magnesium remainder remainder remainder remainder
Aluminum 2.5–3.5 5.8–7.2 7.8–9.2 ...
Manganese 0.20–1.0 0.15–0.5 0.12–0.5 ...
Zinc 0.6–1.4 0.40–1.5 0.20–0.8 4.8–6.2
Thorium ... ... ... ...
Zirconium, min ... ... 0.45
Silicon 0.10 0.10 0.10 ...
Copper 0.05 0.05 0.05 ...
Nickel 0.005 0.005 0.005 ...
Iron 0.005 0.005 0.005 ...
Calcium 0.04 ... ... ...
Other impuritiesC 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
A Limits are in weight percent maximum unless shown as a range or stated otherwise.
B These alloy designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275.
C Includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown.
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specifi-
cation, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded
to the nearest 0.1 ksi (0.7 MPa) and each value for elongation shall be
rounded to the nearest 0.5 %, both in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29.
Alloy and
Temper
Tensile
Strength,
min, ksi
(MPa)
Yield
StrengthA (0.2
% offset),
min, ksi
(MPa)
Elongation
in 2 in.
(51 mm), or
4 3 dia,
min, %
AZ31B–F 34.0 (234) 19.0 (131) 6
AZ61A–F 38.0 (262) 22.0 (152) 6
AZ80A–F 42.0 (290) 26.0 (179) 5
AZ80A–T5 42.0 (290) 28.0 (193) 2
ZK60A–T5 die 42.0 (290) 26.0 (179) 7
forgingsB
ZK60A–T6 die 43.0 (296) 32.0 (221) 4
forgingsB
A See X1.1.6.
B Applicable only to die forgings not more than 3 in. (76 mm) in thickness. The
tensile requirements for hand forgings will be lower and as agreed upon by the
purchaser and manufacturer.
B 91 – 97 (2004)
2
machined to the form and dimensions shown for the1⁄2 in.
(12.7 mm) wide sheet-type specimen in Fig. 6 of Test Methods
B 557.
7.3.1 If required, a die forging representative of the first
production parts shall be selected after forging techniques have
been established, and shall be tested as follows:
7.3.1.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken parallel to the
forging flow lines. The locations shall be as indicated on the
forging engineering drawing or, if not indicated, from generally
representative areas.
7.3.1.2 A sample forging shall be sectioned at the locations
of the specimens, to show the grain flow.
7.3.2 For hand forgings, the specimens shall be taken from
a prolongation of the forgings or from a forging chosen to
represent the lot. Tests will regularly be made only in the
longitudinal direction.
7.4 Test Methods—The tension tests shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods B 557.
NOTE 1—The values obtained for the tensile properties covered by this
specification are not seriously affected by variations in speed of testing. A
considerable range of testing speed is permissible; however, the rate of
stressing to the yield strength should not exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa)/min,
and above the yield strength the movement per minute of the head under
load should not exceed 0.5 in./in. (mm/mm) of gage length. Care must be
exercised, especially when making yield strength determinations, that the
speed of testing does not exceed the ability of the strain- and load-
indicating equipment to function satisfactorily.
7.5 Retests—If any test specimen fails to conform to the
requirements of Table 2, two additional representative speci-
mens shall be selected and tested. If either of these specimens
fails to conform to the requirements, the lot may be rejected. If,
however, it is suspected that specimen failure is due to
inadequate thermal treatment, the material may be reheat-
treated and resampled in accordance with 7.2. Only one such
reheat treatment shall be permitted.
8. General Quality
8.1 All material shall be of uniform quality, free of injurious
surface defects, and shall have a workmanlike finish.
9. Finish
9.1 Unless otherwise specified, the forgings shall be chrome
pickled prior to shipment (see X1.1.7).
10. Inspection
10.1 If the purchaser desires that inspection be made at the
manufacturer’s works where the material is made, it shall be so
stated in the contract or purchase order.
10.1.1 If the purchaser elects to have the inspection made at
the manufacturer’s works, the manufacturer shall afford the
inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification. All tests and inspection shall be so
conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
10.2 Special inspection requirements such as inspection by
ultrasonic reflection or by fluorescent penetrant, must be shown
on the order. Acceptance standards for special inspection
requirements shall be as agreed upon between purchaser and
manufacturer.
11. Rejection
11.1 Material failing to conform to the requirements of this
specification, or in which defects are found during subsequent
manufacturing operations, may be rejected. If rejected, the
manufacturer shall be responsible only for replacement of the
material to the purchaser. All of the rejected original material
shall be returned to the manufacturer.
12. Certification12.1 The supplier shall, on request, furnish to the purchaser,
a certificate stating that the material has been sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification, and has
met the requirements.
13. Product Marking
13.1 The material shall be marked as specified in the
purchase order.
13.2 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, drawing number, quantity, specifica-
tion number, alloy and temper, gross and net weights, and the
name of the manufacturer.
14. Packaging
14.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packing and gross weight of individual containers shall
be left to the discretion of the manufacturer unless otherwise
agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers shall be so
selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical equip-
ment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each package or
container shall contain only one size, alloy, and temper of
material when packaged for shipment unless otherwise agreed
upon.
14.2 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
14.3 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Practices B 660. The applicable
levels shall be as specified in the contract or order. Marking for
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for military
agencies.
14.4 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be marked in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 184.
15. Keywords
15.1 forgings; magnesium alloy
B 91 – 97 (2004)
3
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. EXPLANATORY NOTES
X1.1 General Information
X1.1.1 Standard mechanical property limits for the respec-
tive size ranges are based on an analysis of data from fully
worked production material and are established at a level at
which at least 99 % of the population of the values obtained
from all fully worked material in the size range meets the
established value. The expression “fully worked” refers to
material that has been worked sufficiently during the forging
operations to develop maximum properties. Material that has
been given smaller amounts of working will have correspond-
ingly lower properties.
X1.1.2 Alloy AZ31B has a specific gravity of about 1.77. It
has better press-forging characteristics than any of the other
alloys and may be worked on hammers or mechanical presses.
X1.1.3 Alloy AZ61A has a specific gravity of about 1.81.
The forgeability and mechanical properties are intermediate
between those of alloy AZ31B and AZ80A.
X1.1.4 Alloy AZ80A has a specific gravity of about 1.83. It
is used for hot-press forgings of relatively simple design
requiring maximum mechanical properties.
X1.1.5 Alloy ZK60A has a specific gravity of about 1.83. It
has excellent press-forging characteristics and the best combi-
nations of strength and ductility of the magnesium-forging
alloys.
X1.1.6 The yield strength of magnesium-base alloys is
defined as the stress at which the stress-strain curve deviates
0.2 % from the modulus line. It may be determined by the
“offset method” or the “extension under-load method” (the
latter is often referred to as the “approximate method without
the stress-strain diagram”) as described in Test Methods B 557.
X1.1.7 The chrome pickle treatment increases the resistance
to surface tarnish and corrosion during shipment and storage.
After treatment, the forgings will be dull bronze to bright
yellow in color. The color varies with alloy and temper.
X1.1.7.1 When specified, the chrome pickle treatment shall
conform to Type I and VI of MIL-M-3171.
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
TABLE X1.1 Unit Deformation Values A
Alloy and Temper
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi (MPa)
Unit Defor-
mation, in./
in. (mm/mm)
of Gage
Length
AZ31B–F 19.0(131) 0.0049
AZ61A–F 22.0(152) 0.0054
AZ80A–F 26.0(179) 0.0060
AZ80A–T5 28.0(193) 0.0063
ZK60A–T5 die forgings 26.0(179) 0.0060
A The unit deformation values given in the table for use with the “extension-
under-load method” are based on a modulus of elasticity. E = 6 500 000 psi (4.48
GPa).
B 91 – 97 (2004)
4
Designation: B 92/B 92M – 01
Standard Specification for
Unalloyed Magnesium Ingot and Stick For Remelting 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 92/B 92M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope *
1.1 This specification covers magnesium in the form of
ingot and stick for remelting: 9980A is available in ingot and
stick form, and 9980B, 9990A, 9995A, and 9998A are gener-
ally available only in ingot form.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as a
separate standard. The values stated in each system are not
exact equivalents, therefore each system must be used inde-
pendently of the other.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys2
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition2
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 ingot—a cast form suitable for remelting.
3.1.2 stick—an extruded form substantially uniform in cross
section cut to desired length or weight.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for ingot and stick under this specification shall
include the following information:
4.1.1 Grade (Section 6 and Table 1),
4.1.2 Quantity, in pieces or pounds [kilograms], and
4.1.3 Form; by agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer the approximate form and weight of each piece
or ingot may be specified.
4.1.4 For inch-pound orders specify B92, for metric orders
specify B92M. Do not mix units.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 No scrap shall be used in the production of magnesium
ingot and stick, except such as shall accumulate at the
manufacturer’s plants from material of similar composition and
of his own manufacture.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 Limits—The material shall conform to the requirements
as to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
6.2 Sampling:
6.2.1 Sufficient samples shall be taken by the manufacturer
to assure conformance to the chemical composition require-
ments of the alloy.Samples may be taken from the molten
metal when the ingot is poured or from the ingot. Samples shall
be representative of the material.
6.2.2 In case of dispute, the sampling for chemical analysis
shall be according to the requirements of Practice E 88. If the
ingots are shipped in carload lots of the same alloy, not less
than four ingots shall be taken at random from the carload for
sampling. If the shipment is in less than carload lots, one ingot
shall be taken for sampling for each 10 000 lb [4500 kg] or
fraction thereof.
6.3 Methods of Analysis—Any suitable method of chemical
analysis may be used. In case of dispute, the analysis shall be
made by methods given in Test Methods E 35, or any other
standard methods of analysis approved by ASTM unless some
other method is agreed upon by the purchaser and vendor.
7. General Quality
7.1 Magnesium ingot and stick shall have a clean surface
and shall be commercially free from dirt, slag, or other foreign
material.
8. Rejection
8.1 Material that does not conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected, and if rejected the conditions
of replacement shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser
and the seller. The seller’s responsibility shall be limited to a
period of six months from shipping date unless other agree-
ment is made by the purchaser and seller.
9. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
9.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packaging and gross weight of individual containers
shall be left to the discretion of the seller unless otherwise
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of the ASTM Committee B07 on
Light Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy, Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Apr. 10, 2001. Published April 2001. Originally
published as B 92–33 T. Last previous edition B 92/B 92M–89 (1994)e1.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers shall be so
selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical equip-
ment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each package or
container shall contain only one size and form of material when
packed for shipment unless otherwise agreed upon.
9.2 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
9.3 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, form, quantity, specification number,
gross and net weights, and the name of the manufacturer.
10. Keywords
10.1 chemical specifications; compositional limits; contami-
nants; contents; grades; magnesium; pure; unalloyed
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
This section identifies the principal changes to this standard that have been incorporated since the last issue.
(1) The word “Unalloyed” was added to the title in order to
clearly indicate the specification applies only to unalloyed
grades of magnesium.
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
NOTE 1—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is
suspected or indicated in the course of routine analysis, further analysis shall be made to determine that the total of these other elements is not in excess
of the limits specified in the last column of the table.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value
obtained from analysis should be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
Composition, %
Grade
9980A
(UNS 19980)
Grade
9980B
(UNS M 19991)
Grade
9990A
(UNS 19990)
Grade
9995A
(UNS 19995)
Grade
9998A
(UNS 19998)
Aluminum, max ... ... 0.003 0.01 0.004
Copper, max 0.02 0.02 ... ... 0.0005
Iron, max ... ... 0.04 0.003 0.002
Lead, max 0.01 0.01 ... ... 0.001
Manganese, max 0.10 0.10 0.004 0.004 0.002
Nickel, max 0.001 0.005 0.001 0.001 0.0005
Silicon, max ... ... 0.005 0.005 0.003
Sodium, max 0.006 ... ... ... ...
Tin, max 0.01 0.01 ... ... ...
Titanium, max ... ... ... 0.01 0.001
Other impurities each, maxA,B 0.05 0.05 0.01C 0.005C 0.005C
Magnesium, by difference, min 99.80 99.80 99.90 99.95 99.98
A For specific applications, other minor impurities may be required to be controlled to limiting maxima by agreement between the purchaser and the seller.
B Includes elements for which no specific limit is shown.
C For nuclear applications, the cadmium and boron (high-capture cross-section elements) shall be specified as follows:
Cadmium, max, % 0.0001 or 0.00005
Boron, max, % 0.00007 or 0.00003
B 92/B 92M
2
Designation: B 93/B 93M – 03
Standard Specification for
Magnesium Alloys in Ingot Form for Sand Castings,
Permanent Mold Castings, and Die Castings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 93/B 93M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers magnesium alloys in ingot
form for remelting for the manufacture of sand castings,
permanent mold castings, investment castings, and die cast-
ings.
NOTE 1—Supplementary information pertaining to the alloys covered
by this specification when used in the form of castings is given in
Specifications B 80, B 94, B 199 and B 403.
1.2 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
shall be used independently of the other.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys4
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determinationof Chemical Composition4
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)5
3. Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for ingot to this specification shall include the
following information:
3.1.1 Quantity in pounds (kilograms)
3.1.2 Alloy (Section 4 and Table 1 or Table 2), and
3.1.3 Form: as agreed upon between the purchaser and
seller. Some forms in commercial use are:
Form
Approximate Size Length by Width
by Height, in. (mm)
Approximate
Weight,
lb (kg)
Five-segment 23 by 23⁄4 by 13⁄4 (583 by 70 by 44) 5 (2.3)
Four-segment 28 by 41⁄2 by 4 (711 by 114 by 102) 20 (9.1)
Self-Palletizing 261⁄2 by 65⁄8 by 25⁄8 (672 by 168 by 67) 25 (11.3)
3.1.4 Inspection required at the manufacturer’s works (see
8.1).
3.1.5 For inch-pound orders specify B93; for metric orders
specify B93M. Do not mix units.
4. Chemical Composition
4.1 The ingots shall conform to the chemical composition
limits prescribed in Table 1 for sand cast alloys and permanent
mold-cast alloys and in Table 2 for die-cast alloys. Conform-
ance shall be determined by the manufacturer by analyzing
samples taken at the time the ingots are poured or samples
taken from the ingots. If the manufacturer has determined the
chemical composition of the material during manufacture, he
shall not be required to sample and analyze the ingots.
4.2 The alloys shall conform to the chemical composition
requirements prescribed in Table 1 and Table 2 (Note 2 and
Note 3).
NOTE 2—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements
specifically mentioned in the tables. If, however, the presence of other
elements is suspected or indicated in the course of routine analysis, further
analysis shall be made to determine that the total of these other elements
is not in excess of the limits specified in the last column of the table.
NOTE 3—The following applies to all specified limits in the tables: For
purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated
value obtained from analysis shall be rounded off in accordance with the
rounding off method of Practice E 29 to the nearest unit in the last
right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
5. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
5.1 The ingots shall be uniform in quality and shall be
commercially free of slag or other foreign material.
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Aug. 10, 2003. Published Septemberr 2003. Originally
approved in 1934. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 93/B 93M–00.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
1
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
TA
B
LE
1
C
he
m
ic
al
R
eq
ui
re
m
en
ts
fo
r
A
llo
y
In
go
t
fo
r
R
em
el
t
to
S
an
d,
P
er
m
an
en
t,
M
ol
d
an
d
In
ve
st
m
en
t
C
as
tin
gs
—
C
om
po
si
tio
n
%
A
llo
yA
A
S
T
M
U
N
S
M
ag
-
ne
si
um
A
lu
m
i-
nu
m
M
an
ga
-
ne
se
Z
in
c
Y
ttr
iu
m
R
ar
e
E
ar
th
s
Z
ir-
co
ni
um
S
ili
co
n,
m
ax
C
op
pe
r,
m
ax
N
ic
ke
l,
m
ax
S
ilv
er
Ir
on
,
m
ax
O
th
er
s
ea
ch
m
ax
B
To
ta
l
O
th
er
s,
m
ax
B
A
M
10
0A
M
10
10
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
9.
4–
10
.6
0.
13
–0
.3
5
0.
2
m
ax
...
...
...
0.
20
0.
08
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
A
Z
63
A
M
11
63
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
5.
5–
6.
5
0.
15
–0
.3
5
2.
7–
3.
3
...
...
...
0.
20
0.
20
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
A
Z
81
A
M
11
81
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
7.
2–
8.
0
0.
15
–0
.3
5
0.
5–
0.
9
...
...
...
0.
20
0.
08
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
A
Z
91
C
M
11
91
5
re
m
ai
nd
er
8.
3–
9.
2
0.
15
–0
.3
5
0.
45
–0
.9
...
...
...
0.
20
0.
08
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
A
Z
91
E
M
11
91
8
re
m
ai
nd
er
8.
3–
9.
2
0.
17
–0
.5
0
0.
45
–0
.9
...
...
...
0.
20
0.
01
5
0.
00
10
...
0.
00
5
0.
01
0.
30
A
Z
92
A
M
11
92
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
8.
5–
9.
5
0.
13
–0
.3
5
1.
7–
2.
3
...
...
...
0.
20
0.
20
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
E
Q
21
A
M
18
33
0
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
...
...
...
1.
5–
3.
0C
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
05
–0
.1
0
0.
01
1.
3–
1.
7
...
...
0.
30
E
Z
33
A
M
12
33
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
...
2.
0–
3.
0
...
2.
6–
3.
9
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
K
1A
M
18
01
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
...
...
...
...
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
Q
E
22
A
M
18
22
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
0.
15
m
ax
0.
2
m
ax
...
1.
9C
–2
.4
C
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
2.
0–
3.
0
...
...
0.
30
W
E
43
A
D
E
M
18
43
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
0.
15
m
ax
0.
20
m
ax
3.
7–
4.
3
2.
4-
4.
4E
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
00
5
...
...
.
...
0.
30
W
E
43
B
D
E
M
18
43
3
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
0.
03
m
ax
...
F
3.
7–
4.
3
2.
4–
4.
4E
0.
3–
1.
0
...
0.
01
0.
00
4
...
F
...
0.
01
...
W
E
54
A
D
E
M
18
41
0
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
0.
15
m
ax
0.
20
m
ax
4.
75
–5
.5
1.
5–
4.
0E
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
00
5
...
...
...
0.
30
Z
C
63
A
M
16
33
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
0.
25
–0
.7
5
5.
5–
6.
5
...
...
...
0.
20
2.
4–
3.
00
0.
00
1
...
...
...
0.
30
Z
E
41
A
M
16
41
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
0.
15
m
ax
3.
7–
4.
8
...
1.
0–
1.
75
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
Z
E
63
A
M
16
63
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
...
5.
5–
6.
0
...
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
Z
K
51
A
M
16
51
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
...
3.
8–
5.
3
...
...
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
Z
K
61
A
M
16
61
1
re
m
ai
nd
er
...
...
5.
7–
6.
3
...
...
0.
3–
1.
0
0.
01
0.
03
0.
01
0
...
...
...
0.
30
A
T
he
se
al
lo
y
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
w
er
e
es
ta
bl
is
he
d
in
ac
co
rd
an
ce
w
ith
P
ra
ct
ic
e
B
27
5.
U
N
S
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
w
er
e
es
ta
bl
is
he
d
in
ac
co
rd
an
ce
w
ith
P
ra
ct
ic
e
E
52
7.
B
In
cl
ud
es
lis
te
d
el
em
en
ts
fo
r
w
hi
ch
no
sp
ec
ifi
c
lim
it
is
sh
ow
n.
C
R
ar
e
ea
rt
h
el
em
en
ts
ar
e
in
th
e
fo
rm
of
di
dy
m
iu
m
,
no
t
le
ss
th
an
70
%
N
d
ba
la
nc
e
su
bs
ta
nt
ia
lly
P
r.
D
Li
th
iu
m
co
nt
en
t
fo
r
W
E
43
A
/W
E
43
B
sh
al
lb
e
0.
18
%
m
ax
,
an
d
W
E
54
A
sh
al
lb
e
0.
20
%
m
ax
.
E
R
ar
e
ea
rt
hs
ar
e
2.
0
to
2.
5
%
an
d
1.
5
to
2.
0
%
ne
od
ym
iu
m
fo
r
W
E
43
A
an
d
W
E
54
A
,
re
sp
ec
tiv
el
y,
th
e
re
m
ai
nd
er
be
in
g
pr
in
ci
pa
lly
he
av
y
ra
re
ea
rt
hs
.
F
Z
in
c
+
S
ilv
er
sh
al
lb
e
0.
15
%
m
ax
.
B 93/B 93M – 03
2
6. Sampling for Chemical Analysis
6.1 Sufficient samples shall be taken by the manufacturer to
ensure conformance to the chemical composition requirement
of the alloy.
6.1.1 Samples may be taken from the molten metal when the
ingot is poured or from the ingots. Samples shall be represen-
tative of the material.
6.2 In case of dispute, the sampling for chemical analysis
shall be according to the requirements of Practice E 88.
6.2.1 If the shipment is in less than carload lots and also in
the case of magnesium-zirconium alloys, one ingot section
shall be taken for sampling for each 2200 lb (1000 kg) or
fraction thereof.
7. Methods of Chemical Analysis
7.1 Any suitable method of chemical analysis may be used.
In case of dispute, the analysis shall be made by methods given
in Test Methods E 35 or any other standard methods of analysis
approved by ASTM unless some other method is agreed upon
between the purchaser and vendor.
8. Inspection
8.1 If the purchaser desires that inspection be made at the
manufacturer’s works where the material is made, it shall be so
stated in the contract or purchase order.
8.1.1 If thepurchaser elects to have the inspection made at
the manufacturer’s works, the manufacturer shall afford the
inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification.
8.1.2 All tests and inspection shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
9. Rejection
9.1 Material that does not conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected and, if rejected, the seller’s
responsibility shall be limited to replacing the rejected mate-
rial. The full weight of the rejected material shall be returned
to the manufacturer.
10. Product Marking
10.1 Identification shall be by stamping with the alloy
designation in Table 1 and Table 2.
11. Packaging and Package Marking
11.1 Ingots shall be packaged in such a manner as to prevent
damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The type of
packing and gross weight of individual containers or bundles
shall be left to the discretion of the supplier unless otherwise
agreed upon. Packaging methods shall be so selected as to
permit maximum utility of equipment in unloading and subse-
quent handling. Each container or bundle shall contain only
one size and alloy when packaged for shipment unless other-
wise agreed upon.
11.2 Each package shall be marked with the purchase order
number, quantity, specification number, alloy, gross or net
weights, and, also, the name of the manufacturer.
11.2.1 Each package shall be color-coded on two opposite
corners, visible from four sides, with the colors listed in Table
3 when stated as a purchase order requirement.
11.3 Packages shall be such as to ensure acceptance by
common or other carriers for safe transportation at the lowest
rate to the point of delivery.
11.4 For those alloys listed, the various national regulations
concerning the transportation of these alloys will be complied
with in regard to hazardous materials.
TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements for Alloys Used for Die Castings A
Alloy Composition, %
Designa-
tionB
UNS
Alumi-
num
Manga-
nese
Zinc
Copper,
max
Iron,
max
Silicon
Nickel,
max
Beryllium
Other
Metallic
impuri-
ties, max
eachC
Other
Impuri-
ties,
max
Magnesium
AS41A M10411 3.7–4.8 0.22–0.48 0.10 max 0.04 ... 0.60–1.4 0.01 ... ... 0.30 remainder
AS41B M10413 3.7–4.8 0.35–0.6 0.10 max 0.015 0.0035 0.60–1.4 0.001 0.0005-
0.003
0.01 ... remainder
AM50A M10501 4.5–5.3 0.28–0.50 0.20 max 0.008 0.004 0.08 max 0.001 0.0005-
0.003
0.01 ... remainder
AM60A M10601 5.6–6.4 0.15–0.50 0.20 max 0.25 ... 0.20 max 0.01 ... ... 0.30 remainder
AM60B M10603 5.6–6.4 0.26–0.50 0.20 max 0.008 0.004 0.08 max 0.001 0.0005-
0.003
0.01 ... remainder
AZ91A M11911 8.5–9.5 0.15–0.40 0.45–0.9 0.08 ... 0.20 max 0.01 ... ... 0.30 remainder
AZ91B M11913 8.5–9.5 0.15–0.40 0.45–0.9 0.25 ... 0.20 max 0.01 ... ... 0.30 remainder
AZ91D M11917 8.5–9.5 0.17–0.40 0.45–0.9 0.025 0.004 0.08 max 0.001 0.0005-
0.003
0.01 ... remainder
A The following applies to all specified limits in this table; for purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value obtained from analysis should
be rounded off to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit in accordance with the rounding-off procedure prescribed
in Practice E 29.
B ASTM alloy designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275. UNS Numbers were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
C Includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown.
TABLE 3 Color Code
Alloy Color Code
AM50A Black
AM60A Green and White
AM60B White
AS41A Red
AS41B Red and White
AZ91B Blue and Yellow
AZ91C Brown
AZ91D Yellow
AZ91E Brown and Yellow
B 93/B 93M – 03
3
12. Keywords
12.1 composition; die casting; high pressure die cast alloy;
magnesium; permanent mold casting; sand casting
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
B 93/B 93M – 03
4
Designation: B 94 – 94 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Specification for
Magnesium-Alloy Die Castings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 94; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope *
1.1 This specification covers magnesium-alloy die castings.
Current alloy compositions are specified under the designations
shown in Table 1.2
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are standard. The
SI values in parentheses are provided for information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 93/B 93M Specification for Magnesium Alloys in Ingot
Form for Sand Castings, Permanent Mold Castings, and
Die Castings3
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought3
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products3
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products3
E 23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys6
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition6
E 505 Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminum
and Magnesium Die Castings7
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)8
2.3 American Die Casting Institute:
“E” Series Product Standards3
2.4 Federal Standards:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)9
Fed. Std. No. 184 Identification Marking of Aluminum,
Magnesium and Titanium9
2.5 Military Standard:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
3. Terminology
3.1 Definition:
3.1.1 die casting—a metal object produced by the introduc-
tion of molten metal under substantial pressure into a metal die
and characterized by a high degree of fidelity to the die cavity.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for die castings shall include the following basic
information:
4.1.1 This specification number and date,
4.1.2 Quantity and delivery schedule, as required,
4.1.3 Part name and number,
4.1.4 Alloy (Table 1), and
4.1.5 Drawing of die casting, when required, giving all
necessary dimensions and showing latest revisionsand allow-
ances for machining, if any. Location of ejector pin marks or
parting lines shall be at the option of the producer, unless
specifically designated on the drawing.
4.2 Additional tests, options and special inspection require-
ments as provided below should be justified only on the basis
of need. These shall be specified in the contract or purchase
order, as additional procedures and extended delivery time may
be involved.
4.2.1 Chemical analysis (7.1.1),
4.2.2 Quality assurance (Section 6),
4.2.3 Special proof tests or mechanical properties (Section
8),
4.2.4 General quality options for internal soundness or for
finish (Section 10),
4.2.5 Source inspection (Section 11),
4.2.6 Certification (Section 12),
4.2.7 Marking for identification (Section 14), and
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys, and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Feb. 15, 1994. Published April 1994. Originally
published as B 94–34T. Last previous edition B 94–93.
2 SAE specifications No. 501 and 501A conform to the requirements for Alloy
AZ91A and AZ91B respectively.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
7 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
8 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
9 Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
4.2.8 Special packaging (Section 15).
5. Materials
5.1 The magnesium alloys used for the manufacture of die
castings shall be such that the die castings produced will
conform to the chemical composition requirements of this
specification. Ingot in accordance with Specification B 93/
B 93M may be used but is not restricted to this source.
6. Quality Assurance
6.1 Responsibility for Inspection—When specified in the
contract or purchase order, the producer or supplier is respon-
sible for the performance of all inspection and test require-
ments specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the
contract or order, the producer or supplier may use his own or
any other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspec-
tion and test requirements specified herein, unless disapproved
by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the right to perform
any of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification.
Quality assurance standards shall be agreed upon between the
producer or supplier and purchaser at the time a contract or
order is placed.
6.2 Lot Definition—An inspection lot shall be defined as
follows:
6.2.1 An inspection lot shall consist of the production from
each die or compound die on each machine for each 24 h
during the first week of normal operation and the production
for each 48 h thereafter of normal operation. Any significant
change in the machine, composition, die or continuity of
operation shall be considered as the start of a new lot. Die
castings inspected by this method shall be so marked or
handled during the finishing operations as not to lose their
identity.
6.2.2 Each die casting of a randomly selected sample shall
be examined to determine conformance to the requirements
with respect to general quality, dimensions and identification
marking. The producer or supplier may use a system of
statistical quality control for such examinations.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 Limits—The die casting shall conform to the require-
ments as to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
Conformance shall be determined by the producer by analyzing
samples taken at the time castings are made. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the metal during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
7.1.1 When a detailed chemical analysis is required with a
shipment, it shall be called for in the contract or purchase order.
7.1.2 If the producer’s or supplier’s method of composition
control is acceptable, sampling for chemical analysis may be
waived at the discretion of the purchaser.
7.2 Number of Samples—When required, samples for deter-
mination of chemical composition shall be taken to represent
the following:
7.2.1 A sample shall be taken from each of two representa-
tive castings selected from each lot defined in Section 6.2.1.
7.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples from die castings for
determination of chemical composition shall be taken in
accordance with one of the following methods:
7.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
material by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain a weight of prepared
sample not less than 75 g. Sampling shall be in accordance
with Practice E 88.
7.3.2 By agreement, an appropriate spectrographic sample
may be prepared at time of manufacture.
7.3.3 The method of sampling cast products for spectro-
chemical and other methods of analysis shall be suitable for the
form of material being analyzed and the type of analytical
method used.
7.4 Method of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
cal (Test Methods E 35), spectrochemical, or other methods. In
case of dispute, the results secured by Test Methods E 35 shall
be the basis of acceptance.
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements A,B,C,D
Composition, %
Element UNS M10600 UNS M10410 UNS M10412 UNS M11910 UNS M11912 UNS M11916 UNS M10602 UNS M10500
(Alloy AM60A) (Alloy AS41A) (Alloy AS41B) (Alloy AZ91A) (Alloy AZ91B) (Alloy AZ91D) (Alloy AM60B) (Alloy AM50A)
Magnesium remainder remainder remainder remainder remainder remainder remainder remainder
Aluminum 5.5–6.5 3.5–5.0 3.5–5.0 8.3–9.7 8.3–9.7 8.3–9.7 5.5–6.5 4.4–5.4
Manganese 0.13–0.6 0.20–0.50 0.35–0.7E 0.13–0.50 0.13–0.50 0.15–0.50E 0.24–0.6E 0.26–0.6E
Zinc 0.22 0.12 0.12 0.35–1.0 0.35–1.0 0.35–1.0 0.22 max 0.22
Silicon 0.50 0.50–1.5 0.50–1.5 0.50 0.50 0.10 0.10 0.10
Copper 0.35 0.06 0.02 0.10 0.35 0.030 0.010 0.010
Nickel 0.03 0.03 0.002 0.03 0.03 0.002 0.002 0.002
Iron, max ... ... 0.0035E ... ... 0.005E 0.005E 0.004E
Other metallic impuri-
ties, max, each
... ... 0.02 ... ... 0.02 0.02 0.02
A Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is suspected or indicated in the
course of routine analysis, further analysis shall be made to determine that these other elements are not in excess of 0.3 %.
B The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of acceptance and rejection an observed value or a calculated value obtained from analysis should
be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit in accordance with the rounding procedure prescribed in Section
3 of Practice E 29.
C Where single units are shown, these indicate the maximum amounts permitted.
D ASTM alloy designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275, UNS designations were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
E In alloys AS41B, AM50A, AM60B, and AZ91D, if either the minimum manganese limit or the maximum iron limit is not met, then the iron/manganese ratio shall not
exceed 0.010, 0.015, 0.021, and 0.032, respectively.
B 94
2
8. Mechanical Properties and Tests
8.1 Unless specified in the contract or purchase order or
specifically guaranteed by the manufacturer, acceptance of
die castings under these specifications shall not depend on
mechanical properties determined by tension or impact tests.
Tables X1.1 and X1.2show typical mechanical properties and
characteristics. When tension or impact tests are made, the
tension test specimen shown inFig. 13 of Methods B 557, and
the impact test specimen shown in Fig. 6 of Test Methods E 23
shall be used.
8.2 When specified in the contract or purchase order, die
castings shall withstand proof tests without failure as defined
by agreement between the purchaser and the producer or
supplier.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
9.1 Permissible variations in dimensions shall be within the
limits specified on the drawings or in the contract or purchase
order.
9.1.1 Any dimensions for which a tolerance is not specified
shall be in accord with ADCI Product Standard Series E1 to
E16 inclusive.
9.2 Dimensional tolerance deviations waived by the pur-
chaser shall be confirmed in writing to the producer or supplier.
10. General Quality
10.1 Internal Soundness—When specified, the soundness of
die castings shall conform to standards or requirements agreed
upon between the producer or supplier and the purchaser. The
number and extent of imperfections shall not exceed those
specified by the purchaser. The standards or requirements may
consist of radiographs in accordance with Reference Radio-
graphs E 505, photographs, or sectioned die castings.
10.2 Imperfections inherent in die castings shall not be
cause for rejection provided it is demonstrated that the die
castings are in accordance with the requirements and standards
agreed upon.
10.3 Workmanship—Die castings shall be of uniform qual-
ity, free from injurious discontinuities that will adversely affect
their serviceability.
10.4 Finish—When specified in the contract or purchase
order the as-cast surface finish required shall conform to
standards agreed upon between the purchaser and the producer
or supplier, or as prescribed in ADCI Product Standard E 18.
10.5 Pressure Tightness—When specified in the contract or
purchase order the pressure tightness of die castings shall
conform to standards agreed upon between the purchaser and
the producer or supplier, or as prescribed in ADCI Product
Standard E 17.
11. Source Inspection
11.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect
or witness the inspection and testing of the product prior to
shipment, such agreement shall be made by the purchaser and
producer or supplier as part of the contract or purchase order.
11.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and
testing is agreed upon, the producer or supplier shall afford the
purchaser’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the product meets the requirements of this specifica-
tion. Inspection and tests shall be conducted so there is no
unnecessary interference with the producer’s operations.
12. Rejection and Retest
12.1 When one or more samples, depending on the ap-
proved sampling plan, fail to meet the requirements of this
specification, the represented lot is subject to rejection except
as otherwise provided in 12.2.
12.2 Lots rejected for failure to meet the requirements of
this specification may be resubmitted for test provided:
12.2.1 The producer has removed the nonconforming mate-
rial or the producer has reworked the rejected lot as necessary
to correct the deficiencies.
12.3 Individual castings that show injurious imperfections
during subsequent manufacturing operations may be rejected.
The producer or supplier shall be responsible only for replace-
ment of the rejected castings to the purchaser. As much of the
rejected original material as possible shall be returned to the
producer or supplier.
13. Certification
13.1 The producer or supplier shall, when called for in the
contract or purchase order, furnish to the purchaser a certificate
of inspection stating that each lot has been sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this specification, and has been
found to meet the requirements specified.
14. Product Marking
14.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, all
castings shall be properly marked for identification with the
part number, name or brand of the producer, as agreed upon.
Government applications shall be marked in accordance with
Fed. Std. No. 184.
15. Packaging, Marking, and Storage
15.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified, the die cast-
ings shall be packaged to provide adequate protection during
normal handling and transportation. Each package shall con-
tain only one type of item unless otherwise agreed upon. The
type of packaging and gross weight of containers shall, unless
otherwise agreed upon, be at the producer’s discretion, pro-
vided they are such as to ensure acceptance by common or
other carriers for safe transportation at the lowest rate to the
delivery point.
15.2 Marking—Each shipping container shall be legibly
marked with the purchase order number, gross and net weights,
and the supplier’s name or trademark. Marking for shipment
shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies
and MIL-STD-129 for Military agencies.
15.3 Preservation—Material intended for prolonged storage
in unheated locations shall be adequately packed and protected
to avoid deterioration and damage. When specified in the
contract or purchase order, material shall be preserved, pack-
aged, and packed in accordance with the requirements of
Practices B 660. The applicable levels shall be as specified in
the contract or order.
16. Keywords
16.1 casting characteristics; composition; high pressure die
B 94
3
cast alloy; magnesium; mechanical properties; performance
characteristics
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
X1.1 Table X1.1 shows certain casting and other outstand-
ing characteristics which are usually considered in selecting a
magnesium die casting alloy for a specific application. A
number 1 rating is the highest.
X1.2 The use of separately die-cast test bars was omitted
from this specification revision because they are considered
unreliable. Different machines and dies continue to be neces-
sary for die castings and test bars. Comparison between static
breakdown or proof test and the mechanical properties of
separately die-cast test bars revealed that test bars made in a
different machine in a different die had no correlation with the
die casting, other than a common chemical composition. For
this reason, it is considered that the only practical method is to
have mechanical property control based on proof testing of
whole die castings. For information only, typical separately
die-cast specimen tensile properties are presented in Table
X1.2. These properties are of tension specimens of the form
and dimensions shown in Fig. 13 in Methods B 557 and Fig. 6
of Test Methods E 23, when cast in a die in regular production
routine and conforming to the chemical composition specified
in Table 1. In the tension testing of magnesium alloy speci-
mens, the rate of stressing up to the yield strength shall not
exceed 100 ksi (700 MPa)/min. Exceedingly slow rates of
testing may result in creep and hence are to be avoided.
Beyond the yield strength, the rate of straining shall not exceed
0.25 in./in.·min, measured on the gage length of the specimen.
It should be thoroughly understood that the figures in the table
represent die-cast test specimens and not specimens cut from
commercial die-cast parts.
X1.3 Alloy AM60A has a specific gravity of about 1.78. It
is suggested for use for those applications requiring a combi-
nation of good elongation, yield strength, and tensile strength.
X1.4 Alloy AS41A has a specific gravity of about 1.78. The
alloy possesses good room temperature elongation, yield
strength, and tensile strength. At temperatures up to about
350° F (175° C) it has a much increased creep resistance over
Alloys AZ91A, AZ91B, and AM60A. Maximum resistance to
creep is obtained at the lower aluminum content.
X1.5 Alloys AZ91A and AZ91B have a specific gravity of
about 1.81. The copper and nickel contents in AZ91A should
be kept low to minimize corrosion. The corrosion resistance of
Alloy AZ91B is decreased by the higher copper content and die
castings made from this alloy should be usedunder a known
range of atmospheric conditions for which their life can be
considered satisfactory.
X1.6 Alloys AZ910 and AS41B are high purity versions of
AZ91A and AS41A. As a result they have high resistance to
salt-water (NaCl) corrosion.
TABLE X1.1 Die Casting and Other Characteristics
Alloy UNS ASTM
Approximate
Melting Range,
°F (°C)
Resistance
to Cold
DefectsA
Pressure
Tightness
Resistance
to Hot
CrackingB
MachiningC ElectroplatingD
Surface
TreatmentE
Strength at
Elevated
TemperaturesF
M10500 AM50A 1025–1145
(551–618)
3G 1G 2G 1G 2G 1G 3G
M10600 AM60A 1005–1140
(540–615)
3G 1G 2G 1G 2G 1G 3
M10410 AS41A 1050–1150
(565–620)
4G 1G 1G 1G 2G 1G 2
M10412 AS41B 1050–1150
(565–620)
4G 1G 1G 1G 2G 1G 2
M11910 AZ91A 875–1105
(470–595)
2 2 2 1 2 2 4
M11912 AZ91B 875–1105
(470–595)
2 2 2 1 2 2 4
M11916 AZ91D 875–1105
(470–595)
2 2 2 1 2 2 4
M10602 AM60B 1005–1140
(540–615)
3G 1G 2G 1G 2G 1G 3
A The ability of alloy to resist formation of cold defects; For example, cold shuts, cold cracks, non-fill “woody” areas, swirls, etc.
B Ability of alloy to withstand stresses from contraction while cooling through the hot-short or brittle temperature range.
C Composite rating based on ease of cutting, chip characteristics, quality of finish and tool life.
D Ability of the die casting to take and hold an electroplate applied by present standard methods.
E Ability of castings to be cleaned in standard pickle solutions and to be conditioned for best paint adhesion.
F Rating based on resistance to creep at elevated temperatures.
G Rating based upon limited experience, given guidance only.
B 94
4
X2. METRIC EQUIVALENTS
X2.1 The SI unit for strength properties (MPa) is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
This section identifies the location of changes to this standard that have been incorporated since the last issue.
(1) Alloy AM50A was added to Table 1, Table X1.1, Table
X1.2.
(2) An upper limit was added to the manganese specifications
for alloys AM60A, AM60B, AZ91A, AZ91B, and AZ91D—
Table 1.
(3) Compliance with regard to the minimum manganese limit
and maximum iron limit was deferred to the critical iron
manganese ratio for alloys AM60B and AZ91D in Table 1.
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).
TABLE X1.2 Typical Properties of Magnesium Alloy Die-Cast Test Specimens A
Property
Alloy UNS M10500
(AM50A)
Alloy UNS M10600
(AM60AA) and Alloy
UNS M10602 (AM60B)
Alloy UNS M10410
and M10412
(AS41A) and (AS41B)
Alloys UNS M11910
M11912 and M11916
(AZ91A, AZ91B and AZ91D)
Tensile strength, ksi 29 32 31 34
(MPa) (200) (220) (210) (230)
Tensile yield strength, ksi 16 19 20 23
(MPa) (110) (130) (140) (160)
Compression yield strength, ksi — — — 23
(MPa) — — — (160)
Elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), percent 10 8 6 3
Impact, ft·lbB — — — 2
(J) — — — (3)
Shear strengthC, ksi — — — 20
(MPa) — — — (140)
Fatigue strengthD, ksi — — — 14
(MPa) — — — (100)
Brinell hardness 58 62 — 63
Rockwell hardness, F scale — — — 75
A ksi = 1000 psi. For explanation of SI unit MPa see Appendix X2.
B Unnotched.
C Double-shear tests converted to single-shear values.
D 5 3 108 cycles.
B 94
5
Designation: B 107/B 107M – 00
Standard Specification for
Magnesium-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, Tubes, and
Wire1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 107/B 107M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope *
1.1 This specification covers magnesium-alloy extruded
bars, rods, profiles, tubes, and wire of the composition given in
Table 1.
1.2 The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to
be regarded separately as standards. The SI units are shown in
brackets or in separate tables or columns. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
must be used independent of the other. Combining values from
the two systems may result in nonconformance with the
specification.
1.3 Unless the order specifies the “M” specification desig-
nation, the material shall be furnished to the inch-pound units.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 275 Practice For Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 296 Practice for Temper Designations of Magnesium
Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products2
B 557M Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products (Metric)2
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products2
B 666/B 666M Practice for Identification Marking of Alu-
minum and Magnesium Products2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys4
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys For Determination of Chemical Composition4
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 extruded bar—a solid extrusion, long in relation to its
cross-sectional dimensions, having a symmetrical cross section
that is square or rectangular with sharp or rounded corners or
edges, or is a regular hexagon or octagon, and whose width or
greatest distance between parallel faces is over 0.375 in. [10
mm].
3.1.2 extruded profile—a hollow or solid extrusion, long in
relation to its cross-sectional dimensions, whose cross section
is other than that of wire, rod, bar, or tube.
3.1.3 extruded rod—a solid round extrusion, long in relation
to its diameter, whose diameter is over 0.375 in. [10 mm].
3.1.4 extruded tube—a hollow extrusion, long in relation to
its cross-sectional dimensions, which is symmetrical and is
round, square, rectangular, hexagonal, octagonal, or elliptical
with sharp or roundedcorners, and has a uniform wall
thickness except as affected by corner radii.
3.1.5 producer—the primary manufacturer of a material.
3.1.6 supplier—includes only the category of jobbers and
distributors as distinct from producer.
3.1.7 wire—a solid section long in relation to its cross-
sectional dimensions, having a cross section that is round,
hexagonal, or octagonal, and whose diameter, width, or great-
est distance between parallel faces is up through 0.375 in. [10
mm], or having a symmetrical cross section that is square or
rectangular (excluding flattened wire) with sharp or rounded
corners or edges.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 capable of—means that the test need not be performed
by the producer of the material. However, should subsequent
testing by the purchaser establish that the material does not
meet these requiremetns, the material shall be subject to
rejection.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
following information:
4.1.1 This specification number,
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published August 2000. Originally
published as B 107–36T. Last previous edition B 107/B 107M–94.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. 5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
4.1.2 Quantity in pieces or pounds [kilograms],
4.1.3 Alloy (Section 6),
4.1.4 Temper (Section 7),
4.1.5 Nominal cross-sectional dimensions as follows:
4.1.5.1 For rod and round wire—diameter,
4.1.5.2 For square corner bars and wire—depth and width,
4.1.5.3 For sharp cornered hexagonal or octagonal bars and
wire—distance across flats,
4.1.5.4 For round tube—outside or inside diameter and wall
thickness,
4.1.5.5 For square or sharp cornered other than round
tube—distance across flats and wall thickness,
4.1.5.6 For round cornered bars and wire; profiles; tube
other than round, square, rectangular, hexagonal or octagonal
with sharp corners—drawing required,
4.1.6 Length,
4.1.7 Surface finish (see 9.2),
4.1.8 Whether inspection or witness of inspection and tests
by the purchaser’s representative is required prior to material
shipment (Section 10),
4.1.9 Whether certification is required (Section 12),
4.1.10 Whether marking for identification is required (Sec-
tion 13 and Practices B 660), and
4.1.11 Whether special packaging is required for shipment
(Section 14).
5. Quality Assurance
5.1 Responsibility for Inspection— Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer or supplier
is responsible for the performance of all inspection and test
requirements specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in
the contract or order, the producer or supplier may use his own
or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the
inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless dis-
approved by the purchaser at the time the order is placed. The
purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the inspections
and tests set forth in this specification where such inspections
are deemed necessary to assure that material conforms to
prescribed requirements.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 Limits—The bars, rods, profiles, tubes, or wire shall
conform to the chemical requirements in Table 1.
6.2 Number of Samples—The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
6.2.1 When samples are taken at the time extrusion ingots
are cast for determination of conformance to Table 1, one
sample shall be taken for each group of ingots of the same
alloy, poured at the same time, from the same source of molten
metal when a batch process is employed. In cases where a
continuous casting process is employed, one sample shall be
taken for each quantity of material cast equivalent in size
(weight or volume) to the last holding vessel before casting or
5000 lb [2270 kg], whichever is less. Ingots not conforming to
Table 1 shall be rejected.
6.2.2 Unless compliance is established by 6.2.1, sampling of
the finished product shall be in accordance with Practice E 55.
One sample shall be taken for each 4000 lb (2000 kg) or less
of material comprising the lot, except that not more than one
analysis shall be required per piece.
6.3 Methods of Chemical Analysis—Any suitable method of
chemical analysis may be used. In case of dispute, the analysis
shall be made by methods given in Test Methods E 35 or any
other standard methods of analysis approved by ASTM unless
some other method is agreed upon.
7. Tensile Requirements
7.1 Limits—The bars, rods, profiles, tubes, and wire shall
conform to the tensile properties requirements in Table 2 unless
other agreement is made between producer or supplier and
purchaser. Properties for sizes and tempers not shown in Table
2 shall be as agreed by producer or supplier and purchaser.
7.2 Number of Specimens—From material having nominal
weight of less than 1 lb/linear ft [through 1.7 kg/linear m], one
tension test sample shall be taken for each 1000 lb [500 kg] or
fraction thereof in the shipment. For material having a nominal
weight of 1 lb/linear ft [over 1.7 kg/linear m] or more, one
tension test shall be taken for each 1000 ft [300 m] or fraction
thereof in the shipment. Other procedures for selecting samples
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements A
NOTE 1—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is
suspected or indicated in the course of routine analysis to be in amounts greater than the specified limits, further analysis shall be made to determinethat
the total of these other elements is not in excess of the limits specified in the last column of the table.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value
obtained from analysis should be rounded-off to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
AlloyB Composition,%
UNS
No.
ASTM
No.
Magnesium
Alumi-
num
Man-
ganese
Zinc
Zirco-
nium,
min
Sili-
con
Cop-
per
Nickel Iron
Cal-
cium
OtherC
Impuri-
ties
M11311 AZ31B remainder 2.5–3.5 0.20–1.0 0.6–1.4 ... 0.10 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.04 0.30
M11312 AZ31C remainder 2.4–3.6 0.15–1.0D 0.50–1.5 ... 0.10 0.10 0.03 ... ... 0.30
M11610 AZ61A remainder 5.8–7.2 0.15–0.5 0.40–1.5 ... 0.10 0.05 0.005 0.005 ... 0.30
M11800 AZ80A remainder 7.8–9.2 0.12–0.5 0.20–0.8 ... 0.10 0.05 0.005 0.005 ... 0.30
M15100 M1A remainder ... 1.2–2.0 ... ... 0.10 0.05 0.01 ... 0.30 0.30
M16400 ZK40A remainder ... ... 3.5–4.5 0.45 ... ... ... ... ... 0.30
M16600 ZK60A remainder ... ... 4.8–6.2 0.45 ... ... ... ... ... 0.30
A Limits are in weight percent maximum unless shown as a range or otherwise stated.
B These alloy designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275 (see also Practice E 527).
C Includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown.
D Manganese minimum limit need not be met if iron is 0.005 %, or less.
B 107/B 107M
2
may be employed if agreed upon by the seller and the
purchaser.
7.3 Geometry of test specimens and the location in the
product from which they are taken shall be as specified in Test
Methods B 557 and B 557M.
7.4 Test Methods—The tension tests shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods B 557 and B 557M.
7.5 Retests—If any tension specimen fails to conform to the
requirements prescribed in Table 2, two additional specimens
shall be selected and tested from other bars, rods, profiles,
tubes, or wire in the lot. If either of thesespecimens fails to
conform to the applicable requirements, the material may be
rejected. If, however, the failure of the specimens to conform to
the requirements is the result of an inadequate thermal treat-
ment, the material may be reheat treated and resampled in
accordance with 7.2.
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
NOTE—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded to the
nearest 100 psi and each value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 %, both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
AlloyA
Tem-
perA
Form
Specified
Diameter or
Thickness
Over-Through
Specified
Cross-Sec-
tional Area,
in.2 or OD of
Tube, in.
Tensile
Strength,
min
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min
Elongation in
2 in. [50 mm]
or 4 3 Dia.,
min, %B,C
UNS
No.
ASTM
No.
in.D,E
[mm] ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa]
M11311 AZ31B F bars, rods, profiles, 0.249 and [...–6.30] all 35.0 [240] 21.0 [145] 7
and wire under
0.250–1.499 [6.30–40.00] all 35.0 [240] 22.0 [150] 7
1.500–2.499 [40.00–60.00] all 34.0 [235] 22.0 [150] 7
2.500–4.999 [60.00–130.00] all 32.0 [220] 20.0 [140] 7
hollow profiles all all 32.0 [220] 16.0 [110] 8
tubes 0.028–0.250 [0.70–6.30] 6.000 [150.00] 32.0 [220] 20.0 [140] 8
and under
0.250–0.750 [6.30–20.00] 32.0 [220] 16.0 [110] 4
M11610 AZ61A F bars, rods, profiles, 0.249 and [...–6.30] all 38.0 [260] 21.0 [145] 8
and wire under
0.250–2.499 [6.30–60.00] all 40.0 [275] 24.0 [165] 9
2.500–4.999 [60.00–130.00] all 40.0 [275] 22.0 [150] 7
hollow profiles all all 36.0 [250] 16.0 [110] 7
tubes 0.028–0.750 [0.70–20.00] 6.000 [150.00]
and under
36.0 [250] 16.0 [110] 7
M11800 AZ80A F bars, rods, solid 0.249 and [...–6.30] all 43.0 [295] 28.0 [195] 9
profiles, and wire under
0.250–1.499 [6.30–40.00] all 43.0 [295] 28.0 [195] 8
1.500–2.499 [40.00–60.00] all 43.0 [295] 28.0 [195] 6
2.500–4.999 [60.00–130.00] all 42.0 [290] 27.0 [185] 4
M11800 AZ80A T5 bars, rods, solid 0.249 and [...–6.30] all 47.0 [325] 30.0 [205] 4
profiles, and wire under
0.250–2.499 [6.30–60.00] all 48.0 [330] 33.0 [230] 4
2.500–4.999 [60.00–130.00] all 45.0 [310] 30.0 [205] 2
M15100 M1A F bars, rods, profiles, 0.249 and [...–6.30] all 30.0 [205] F [13] 2
and wire under
0.250–1.499 [6.30–40.00] all 32.0 [220] F [13] 3
1.500–2.499 [40.00–60.00] all 32.0 [220] F [13] 2
2.500–4.999 [60.00–130.00] all 29.0 [200] F [13] 2
hollow profiles all all 28.0 [195] F [13] 2
tubes 0.028–0.750 [0.70–20.00] 6.000 [150.00]
and under
28.0 [195] F [13] 2
M16400 ZK40A T5 bars, rods, profiles,
and wire
all 3.000 [1900]
and under
37.0 [255] 34.0 [235] 4.0
hollow profiles all all 40.0 [275] 37.0 [255] 4.0
tubes 0.062–0.500 [1.60–12.50] 3.000 [80.00]
and under
40.0 [275] 36.0 [255] 4.0
B 107/B 107M
3
TABLE 2 Continued
AlloyA
Tem-
perA
Form
Specified
Diameter or
Thickness
Over-Through
Specified
Cross-Sec-
tional Area,
in.2 or OD of
Tube, in.
Tensile
Strength,
min
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min
Elongation in
2 in. [50 mm]
or 4 3 Dia.,
min, %B,C
UNS
No.
ASTM
No.
in.D,E
[mm] ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa]
M16600 ZK60A F bars, rods, profiles,
and wire
all 4.999 [3200]
and under
43.0 [295] 31.0 [215] 5
5.000–39.999 43.0 [295] 31.0 [215] 6
[3201–26 000]
hollow profiles all all 40.0 [275] 28.0 [195] 5
tubes 0.028–0.750 [0.70–20.00] 3.000 [80.00]
and under
40.0 [275] 28.0 [195] 5
M16600 ZK60A T5 bars, rods, profiles,
and wire
all 4.999 [3200]
and under
5.000–24.999
[3201–16 000]
25.000–39.999
[16 001–26 000]
45.0
45.0
43.0
[310]
[310]
[295]
36.0
34.0
31.0
[250]
[235]
[215]
4
6
6
hollow profiles all all 46.0 [315] 38.0 [260] 4
tubes 0.028–0.250
0.094–1.188
[0.70–6.30]
[2.50–30.00]
3.000 [80.00]
and under
3.001 [80.00]–
8.500 [215]
46.0
44.0
[315]
[305]
38.0
33.0
[260]
[230]
4
4
A See Practice B 296.
B Elongation of full-section and machined sheet-type specimens is measured in 2 in. [50 mm] of machined round specimens, in 4 3 specimen dia. [5 3 dia. in metric].
C For material of such dimensions that a standard test specimen cannot be obtained, for wire less than 0.125 in. diameter [3.2 mm diameter], or for material thinner than
0.062 in. [1.60 mm] the test for elongation is not required.
D Intermediate dimensions shall be rounded off to the third decimal place in accordance with Practice E 29.
E Wall thickness of tubes.
F Not required.
B 107/B 107M
4
TABLE 3 Cross-Sectional Tolerances for Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Wire A
Specified
Dimension, in.
ToleranceB,C in. 6
Metal Dimensions Space Dimensions
Allowable Deviation from Specified
Dimension Where 75% or More
of the Dimension is MetalD
Allowable Deviation from Specified Dimension Where More
than 25% of the Dimension is SpaceE,F
All Except
Those Covered
By Column
3
Wall ThicknessG,H, I
Completely Enclosing
Space
0.11 in.2 and Over
(Eccentricity)
At Dimensioned
Points
0.250–0.624
in. from Base
of Leg
At Dimensioned
Points
0.625–1.249
in. from Base
of Leg
At Dimensioned
Points
1.250–2.499
in. from Base
of Leg
At Dimensioned
Points
2.500–3.999
in. from Base
of Leg
At
Dimensioned
Points
4.000–5.999
in. from Base
of Leg
At
Dimensioned
Points
6.000–8.000
in. from Base
of Leg
Col. 1 Col. 2 Col. 3 Col. 4 Col. 5 Col. 6 Col. 7 Col. 8 Col. 9
Circumscribing Circle Sizes Less than 10 in. in Dia
0.124 and under 0.006 610 % of specified 0.010 0.012 ... ... ... ...
0.125–0.249 0.007 dimension: 0.012 0.014 0.016 ... ... ...
0.250–0.499 0.008 60.060 max 0.014 0.016 0.018 0.020 ... ...
0.500–0.749 0.009 0.010 min 0.016 0.018 0.020 0.022 ... ...
0.750–0.999 0.010 0.018 0.020 0.022 0.025 0.30 ...
1.000–1.499 0.012 0.021 0.023 0.026 0.030 0.035 ...
1.500–1.999 0.014 0.024 0.026 0.031 0.036 0.042 0.050
2.000–3.999 0.024 0.034 0.038 0.048 0.057 0.068 0.080
4.000–5.999 0.034 0.044 0.050 0.064 0.078 0.094 0.110
6.000–7.999 0.044 0.054 0.062 0.082 0.099 0.120 0.140
8.000–9.999 0.054 0.064 0.074 0.100 0.120 0.145 0.170
Circumscribing Circle Sizes 10 in. in Dia and Over
0.124 and under 0.014 615 % of specified 0.018 0.020 ... ... ... ...
0.125–0.249 0.015 dimension: 0.019 0.022 0.028 ... ... ...
0.250–0.499 0.016 60.090 max 0.020 0.024 0.030 0.050 ... ...
0.500–0.749 0.017 60.015 min 0.022 0.027 0.040 0.060 ... ...
0.750–0.999 0.018 0.023 0.030 0.050 0.070 0.090 ...
1.000–1.499 0.019 0.024 0.034 0.060 0.080 0.100 ...
1.500–1.999 0.024 0.034 0.044 0.070 0.090 0.110 0.170
2.000–3.999 0.034 0.044 0.054 0.080 0.100 0.120 0.180
4.000–5.999 0.044 0.054 0.064 0.090 0.110 0.130 0.190
6.000–7.999 0.054 0.064 0.074 0.100 0.120 0.140 0.200
8.000–9.999 0.064 0.074 0.084 0.110 0.130 0.150 0.210
10.000–11.999 0.074 0.084 0.094 0.120 0.140 0.160 0.220
12.000–13.999 0.084 0.094 0.104 0.130 0.150 0.170 0.230
14.000–15.999 0.094 0.104 0.114 0.140 0.160 0.180 0.240
16.000–17.999 0.104 0.114 0.124 0.150 0.170 0.190 0.250
18.000–19.999
20.000–21.999
22.000–23.999
0.114
0.124
0.134
0.124
0.134
0.144
0.134
0.144
0.154
0.160
0.170
0.180
0.180
0.190
0.200
0.200
0.210
0.220
0.260
0.270
0.280
A These tolerances are applicable to the average profile. Wider tolerances may be required for some profiles and closer tolerances may be possible for others.
B The tolerances applicable to a dimension composed of two or more component dimensions is the sum of the tolerances of the component dimensions if all of the
component dimensions are indicated.
C When a tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the maximum
dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
D These tolerances do not apply to space dimensions such as dimensions X and Z of the example even when Y is 75 % or more of X. For the tolerance applicable to
dimensions X, use Col. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9, dependent on distance A and the circumscribing circle diameter.
E At points less than 0.250 in. from base of leg the tolerances in Column 2 are applicable.
B 107/B 107M
5
F The following tolerances apply where the spaceis completely enclosed (hollow profiles): For the width (A) the tolerance is the value shown in Column 4 for the
depth (D), the tolerance is the value shown in Column 4 for the width (A). In no case is the tolerance for either width or depth less than at the corners (Column 2,
metal dimensions).
Example—Hollow profile having 1 by 3 in. rectangular outside dimensions and having a circumscribing circle diameter less than 10 in.: width tolerance is6 0.024 in.
and depth tolerance 60.034 in. (Tolerances at corners, Column 2, metal dimensions, are 60.024 in. for the width and6 0.012 in. for the depth.)
G Where dimensions specified are outside and inside, rather than wall thickness itself, the allowable deviation (eccentricity) given in Column 3 applies to mean wall
thickness (mean wall thickness is the average of two wall thickness measurements taken at opposite sides of the void).
H In the case of Class 1 Hollow Profiles the standard wall thickness tolerance for extruded round tube is applicable. (A Class 1 Hollow Profile is one whose void is
round and 1 in. or more in diameter and whose weight is equally distributed on opposite sides of two or more equally spaced axes.)
I Tolerance applicable to the wall thickness enclosing the void of hollow and semihollow profiles is subject to negotiation when the nominal thickness of one wall is
three times or greater than that of the opposite wall.
B 107/B 107M
6
TABLE 4 Cross Section Tolerances for Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Wire [Metric] A
ToleranceB,C mm 6
Specified
Dimensions
(mm)
Metal Dimensions Space Dimensions
Allowable Deviation from Specified
Dimension Where 75 % or More of
the Dimension is MetalD
Allowable Deviation from Specified Dimension Where More than 25 % of the Dimension is
SpaceE,F
All Except
Those
Covered
by Column
3
Wall Thickness
Completely Enclos-
ing Space 7.0 mm
and Over
(Eccentricity)G,H,I
At Dimen-
sioned Points
Over 5
through
15 mm from
Base of Leg
At Dimen-
sioned
Points
Over 15
through
30 mm from
Base of Leg
At Dimen-
sioned Points
Over 30
through
60 mm from
Base of Leg
At Dimen-
sioned Points
Over 60
through
100 mm from
Base of Leg
At Dimen-
sioned Points
Over 100
through
150 mm from
Base of Leg
At Dimen-
sioned Points
Over 150
through
200 mm from
Base of Leg
Col. 1 Col. 2 Col. 3 Col. 4 Col. 5 Col. 6 Col. 7 Col. 8 Col. 9
Over Through Circumscribing Circle Sizes Thru 250 mm in Diameter
0 3.20 0.15 610 % of specified 0.25 0.30 ... ... ... ...
3.20 6.30 0.18 dimensions: 0.30 0.36 0.41 ... ... ...
6.30 12.50 0.20 61.50 max 0.36 0.41 0.46 0.50 ... ...
12.50 20.00 0.23 60.25 min 0.41 0.46 0.50 0.56 ... ...
20.00 25.00 0.25 0.46 0.50 0.56 0.64 0.76 ...
25.00 40.00 0.30 0.54 0.58 0.66 0.76 0.88 ...
40.00 50.00 0.36 0.60 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.05 1.25
50.00 100.00 0.60 0.86 0.96 1.20 1.45 1.70 2.05
100.00 150.00 0.86 1.10 1.25 1.65 2.00 2.40 2.80
150.00 200.00 1.10 1.35 1.55 2.10 2.50 3.05 3.55
200.00 250.00 1.35 1.65 1.90 2.50 3.05 3.70 4.30
Circumscribing Circle Sizes Over 250 mm in Diameter
0 3.20 0.36 615 % of specified 0.46 0.50 ... ... ... ...
3.20 6.30 0.38 dimensions: 0.48 0.56 0.72 ... ... ...
6.30 12.50 0.41 62.30 max 0.50 0.60 0.76 1.25 ... ...
12.50 20.00 0.43 60.38 min 0.56 0.68 1.00 1.50 ... ...
20.00 25.00 0.46 0.58 0.76 1.25 1.80 2.30 ...
25.00 40.00 0.48 0.60 0.86 1.50 2.05 2.55 ...
40.00 50.00 0.60 0.86 1.10 1.80 2.30 2.80 4.30
50.00 100.00 0.86 1.10 1.35 2.05 2.55 3.05 4.55
100.00 150.00 1.10 1.35 1.65 2.30 2.80 3.30 4.85
150.00 200.00 1.35 1.65 1.90 2.55 3.05 3.55 5.10
200.00 250.00 1.65 1.90 2.15 2.80 3.20 3.80 5.35
250.00 300.00 1.90 2.15 2.40 3.05 3.55 4.05 5.60
300.00 350.00 2.15 2.40 2.65 3.30 3.80 4.30 5.85
350.00 400.00 2.40 2.65 2.90 3.55 4.05 4.55 6.10
400.00 450.00 2.65 2.90 3.15 3.80 4.30 4.85 6.35
450.00
500.00
500.00
550.00
2.90
3.15
3.15
3.40
3.40
3.65
4.05
4.30
4.55
4.85
5.10
5.25
6.60
6.85
550.00 600.00 3.40 3.65 3.90 4.55 5.10 5.60 7.10
A These tolerances are applicable to the average profile. Wider tolerances may be required for some profiles and closer tolerances may be possible for others.
B The tolerances applicable to a dimension composed of two or more component dimensions is the sum of the tolerances of the component dimensions if all of the
component dimensions are indicated.
C When a tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the maximum
dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
D These tolerances do not apply to space dimensions such as dimensions X and Z of the example even when Y is 75 % or more of X. For the tolerance applicable to
dimensions X, use columns 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9, dependent on distance A and the circumscribing circle diameter.
E At points less than 6.30 mm in from base of leg the tolerances in Column 2 are applicable.
B 107/B 107M
7
F The following tolerances apply where the space is completely enclosed (hollow profiles): For the width (A) the tolerance is the value shown in Column 4 for the
depth (D). For the depth (D), the tolerance is the value shown in Column 4 for the width (A). In no case is the tolerance for either width or depth less than at the cor-
ners (Column 2, metal dimensions).
Example—Hollow profile having 25 mm by 75 mm rectangular outside dimensions and having a circumscribing circle diameter less than 250 mm: width tolerance is
60.60 mm and depth tolerance 61 mm. Tolerances at corners, Column 2, metal dimensions, are 60.060 mm for the width and 6 0.30 mm for the depth.)
G Where dimensions specified are outside and inside, rather than wall thickness itself, the allowable deviation (eccentricity) given in Column 3 applies to mean wall
thickness (mean wall thickness is the average of two wall thickness measurements taken at opposite sides of the void).
H In the case of Class 1 Hollow Profiles the standard wall thickness tolerance for extruded round tube is applicable. (A Class 1 Hollow Profile is one whose void is
round and 2 mm or more in diameter and whose weight is equally distributed on opposite sides of two or more equally spaced axes.)
I Tolerance applicable to the wall thickness enclosing the void of hollow and semihollow profiles is subject to negotiation when the nominal thickness of one wall is
three times or greater than that of the opposite wall.
B 107/B 107M
8
8. Dimensional Tolerances
8.1 Variations from the specified cross-sectional dimensions
shall not exceed the amounts prescribed in Tables 3-10 as
applicable.
8.2 Straightness shall conform to the requirements of Tables
11-14.
8.3 Variation in length shall not exceed the amount permit-
ted by Table 15.
8.4 Variations from any specified angles shall not exceed the
amount permitted by Table 16.
8.5 Roughness of surface of bars, rods, and profiles shall not
exceed the amount permitted by Table 17.
8.6 Variations from a specified radius shall not exceed the
amount permitted by Table 18.
8.7 Flatness shall conform to the requirements of Table 19.
8.8 The allowable deviation from a specified contour shall
be 0.005 in./in. [0.005 mm/mm] of chord length, 0.005 in.
[0.13 mm] min; not applicable to more than 90° of any arc.
8.9 The allowable deviation from square of cut ends other
than on wire shall not exceed 1°.
9. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
9.1 All material shall be of uniform quality, free from
injurious surface defects, and shall have a workmanlike finish.
9.2 The extruded rod, bar, profiles, tube, or wire shall be
supplied in the finish specified by the purchaser. One of these
finishes should be specified:
9.2.1 Plain (mill finish), or
9.2.2 Plain and oiled.
10. Inspection
10.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect
or witness the inspection and testing of the material prior to
shipment, such agreement shall be made part of the purchase
contract.
10.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and
testing is agreed upon, the producer or supplier shall afford the
purchaser’s representativeall reasonable facilities to determine
that the material meets the requirements of this specification.
Inspection shall be conducted so there is no necessary inter-
ference with the producer’s or supplier’s operation.
11. Rejection
11.1 Material failing to conform to the requirements of this
specification, or in which defects are discovered during subse-
quent manufacturing operations, may be rejected. If rejected,
the seller shall be responsible only for replacement of the
material to the purchaser. All of the rejected material shall be
returned to the producer or supplier.
12. Certification
12.1 The producer or supplier shall, on request, furnish to
the purchaser a certificate stating that each lot has been
sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this speci-
fication, and has met the requirements.
13. Product Marking
13.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, all
material shall be marked in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 184
except that this specification number shall be used.
TABLE 5 Diameter Tolerances for Round Tubes
Tolerance, 6, in. [mm]A
Allowable Deviation
of Mean DiameterB
from Specified
Diameter (Size)
Alowable Deviation of Diameter at any
Point from Specified Diameter
(Ovality)C
Specified Outside or Inside
Diameter, in. [mm]D
Difference Between
1⁄2 (AA + BB) and
Specified Diameter
Difference Between AA and Specified
Diameter
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Over-Through
0.499 and under [...–12.50] 0.008 [0.20] 0.016 [0.40]
0.500–0.999 [12.50–25.00] 0.010 [0.25] 0.020 [0.50]
1.000–1.999 [25.00–50.00] 0.012 [0.30] 0.025 [0.64]
2.000–3.999 [50.00–100.00] 0.015 [0.38] 0.030 [0.76]
4.000–5.999 [100.00–150.00] 0.025 [0.64] 0.050 [1.25]
6.000–7.999 [150.00–200.00] 0.035 [0.88] 0.075 [1.90]
8.000–9.999 [200.00–250.00] 0.045 [1.15] 0.100 [2.55]
10.000–11.999 [250.00–300.00] 0.055 [1.40] 0.125 [3.20]
12.000–13.999 [300.00–350.00] 0.065 [1.65] 0.150 [3.80]
14.000–15.999 [350.00–400.00] 0.075 [1.90] 0.175 [4.45]
16.000–17.999 [400.00–450.00] 0.085 [2.15] 0.200 [5.10]
A When a tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the maximum
and minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
B Mean diameter is the average of two diameter measurements taken at right angles to each other at any point along the length.
C Not applicable if the wall thickness is less than 21⁄2 % of the outside diameter.
D When outside diameter, inside diameter, and wall thickness are all specified, standard tolerances are applicable to any two of these dimensions, but not to all three.
B 107/B 107M
9
13.2 The requirements specified in 13.1 are minimum;
marking systems that involve added information, larger char-
acters, and greater frequencies are acceptable under this
specification and shall be agreed upon between the producer or
supplier and purchaser.
13.3 Smaller straight bars, rods, tubes, sections, and wire
shall be identified by two tags marked with the information in
13.1 and attached, not farther than 2 ft (610 mm) from each
end, to the product in each bundle, box, or lift unless other
agreement is made.
14. Packaging and Package Marking
14.1 The material shall be packaged to provide adequate
protection during normal handling and transportation and each
package shall contain only one size, alloy, or temper of
material unless otherwise agreed. The type of packaging and
gross weight of containers shall, unless otherwise agreed upon,
be at the seller’s discretion, provided they are such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the delivery point.
14.2 Each shipping container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, material size, specification number,
alloy and temper, gross and net weights, and the manufactur-
er’s name or trademark.
14.3 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Practices B 660. The applicable
level shall be as specified in the contract or purchase order.
Marking for shipment of such material shall be in accordance
with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for
military agencies.
15. Keywords
15.1 compositions; dimensional tolerances; extrusions;
magnesium; mechanical properties
TABLE 6 Width and Depth Tolerances for Square, Rectangular, Hexagonal and Octagonal Tubes
Tolerance, 6, in. [mm]A
Allowable Deviation of Width or
Depth at Corners from Specified
Width or Depth
Allowable Deviation of Width or Depth Not at
Corners from Specified Width or DepthB
Specified Width or
Depth, in. [mm]C
Difference Between AA and
Specified Width or Depth
Difference Between AA and Specified Width,
Depth, or Distance Across Flats
Square, Rectangular
Square,
Hexagonal
Octagonal
Rectangular
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4
Over Through
0.500–0.749
0.750–0.999
1.000–1.999
[12.50–20.00]
[20.00–25.00]
[25.00–50.00]
0.012 [0.30]
0.014 [0.36]
0.018 [0.46]
0.020 [0.50]
0.020 [0.50]
0.025 [0.64]
The tolerance for the width is the value in Column 3 for
a dimension equal to the depth, and conversely, but in
no case is the tolerance less than at the corners.D
2.000–3.999 [50.00–100.00] 0.025 [0.64] 0.035 [0.88]
4.000–4.999 [100.00–130.00] 0.035 [0.88] 0.045 [1.15]
5.000–5.999 [130.00–150.00] 0.045 [1.15] 0.055 [1.40]
6.000–6.999 [150.00–180.00] 0.055 [1.40] 0.065 [1.65]
7.000–7.999 [180.00–200.00] 0.065 [1.65] 0.075 [1.90]
8.000–8.999 [200.00–230.00] 0.075 [1.90] 0.085 [2.15]
9.000–9.999 [230.00–250.00] 0.085 [2.15] 0.095 [2.40]
10.000–10.999 [250.00–280.00] 0.095 [2.40] 0.105 [2.65]
11.000–12.999 [280.00–330.00] 0.105 [2.65] 0.115 [2.90]
A When a tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the maximum
and minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
B Not applicable if wall thickness is less than 21⁄2 % of the equivalent round diameter. The equivalent round diameter is the diameter of a circle having a circumference
equal to the perimeter of the tube.
C When outside, inside, and wall thickness dimensions are all specified, standard tolerances are applicable to any two of these dimensions, but not to all three.
D Example—The width tolerance of 1 by 3 in. [25 by 75 mm] rectangular tube in Column 3 is6 0.025 in. [60.64 mm] and the depth tolerance is 60.035 in. [60.88 mm].
B 107/B 107M
10
TABLE 7 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Round Tubes
Tolerance, 6, in.A,B
Allowable Deviation of Mean Wall ThicknessC
from Specified Wall Thickness
Allowable Deviation of Wall
Thickness at any Point from
Mean Wall ThicknessC
(Eccentricity)
Specified Wall
Thickness, in.D
Difference Between 1⁄2(AA + BB)
and Specified Wall Thickness
Outside Diameter, in.
1.249 and
Under 1.250–2.999 3.000–4.999
5.000 and
Over
Difference Between AA and
Mean Wall Thickness
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6
0.046 and under
0.047–0.061
0.062–0.077
0.006
0.007
0.008
...
0.008
0.008
...
0.008
0.009
...
0.010
0.012
610% of the mean wall thickness
(60.060 in. max, 6 0.010 in. min)
0.078–0.124 0.009 0.009 0.010 0.015
0.125–0.249 0.009 0.009 0.013 0.020
0.250–0.374 0.011 0.011 0.016 0.025
0.375–0.499 ... 0.015 0.021 0.035
0.500–0.749 ... 0.020 0.028 0.045 610% of the mean wall thickness
(60.060 in. max, 6 0.010 in. min)
0.750–0.999 ... ... 0.035 0.055
1.000–1.499 ... ... 0.045 0.065
1.500–2.000 ... ... ... 0.075
2.001–2.499 ... ... ... 0.085 60.120 in. max
2.500–2.999 ... ... ... 0.095
3.000–3.499 ... ... ... 0.105
3.500–4.000 ... ... ... 0.115
A When outside diameter, inside diameter, and wall thickness are all specified, standard tolerances are applicable to any two of these dimensions, but not to all three.
B When a dimension tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the
maximumand minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
C The mean wall thickness of round tube is the average of two measurements taken opposite each other.
D When dimensions specified are outside and inside, rather than wall thickness itself, the allowable deviation at any point (eccentricity) is 610 % of the mean wall
thickness; 60.060 in. max,6 0.010 in. min.
B 107/B 107M
11
TABLE 8 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Round Tubes [Metric]
Tolerance, 6, mmA,B
Allowable Deviation of Mean Wall ThicknessC from
Specified Wall Thickness
Allowable Deviation of Wall
Thickness at any Point from
Mean Wall ThicknessA
(Eccentricity)
Specified Wall Thickness, mmD
Difference Between 1⁄2 (AA + BB) and Specified
Wall Thickness
Difference Between AA and
Mean Wall Thickness
Outside Diameter, mm
Up Through Over 30 Over 80 Over Difference Between AA and Mean Wall
30 Through 80 Through 130 130 Thickness
Column 1
Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6
Over Through
0
1.20
1.60
1.20
1.60
2.00
0.15
0.18
0.20
...
0.20
0.20
...
0.20
0.23
...
0.25
0.30
610 % of the mean wall thickness (61.50
mm max,6 0.25 mm min)
2.00 3.20 0.23 0.25 0.25 0.38
3.20 6.30 0.25 0.25 0.33 0.50
6.30 10.00 0.28 0.28 0.40 0.64
10.00 12.50 ... 0.38 0.53 0.88
12.50 20.00 ... 0.50 0.72 1.15 610 % of the mean wall thickness (61.5
mm max,6 0.25 mm min)
20.00 25.00 ... ... 0.98 1.40
25.00 35.00 ... ... 1.15 1.65
35.00 50.00 ... ... ... 1.90
50.00 60.00 ... ... ... 2.15 63.00 mm
60.00 80.00 ... ... ... 2.40
80.00 90.00 ... ... ... 2.65
90.00 100.00 ... ... ... 2.90
A When outside diameter, inside diameter, and wall thickness are all specified, standard tolerances are applicable to any two of these dimensions, but not to all three.
B When a dimension tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the
maximum and minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
C The mean wall thickness of round tube is the average of two measurements taken opposite to each other.
D When dimensions specified are outside and inside, rather than wall thickness itself, the allowable deviation at any point (eccentricity) is 610 % of the mean wall
thickness; 61.50 mm max,6 0.25 mm min.
B 107/B 107M
12
TABLE 9 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Square, Rectangular, Hexagonal, and Octagonal Tubes
Tolerance, 6, in.A,B
Allowable Deviation of MeanC Wall
Thickness from Specified Wall Thickness
Allowable Deviation of Wall Thickness at any
Point from Mean Wall ThicknessC (Eccentricity)
Specified Wall
Thickness,D in.
Difference Between 1⁄2 (AA + BB)
and Specified Wall Thickness
Difference Between AA and Mean Wall
Thickness
Circumscribing Circle Diameter, in.E
4.999 and Under 5.000 and Over 4.999 and Under 5.000 and Over
Col. 1 Col. 2 Col. 3 Col. 4 Col. 5
0.046 and under 0.005 0.008 0.005 610% of the mean wall thickness
(60.060 in. max, 60.010 in. min)
0.047–0.061 0.006 0.009 0.007
0.062–0.124 0.007 0.010 0.010
0.125–0.249 0.008 0.015 0.015
0.250–0.374 0.011 0.020 0.025
0.375–0.499 0.014 0.030 0.030
0.500–0.749 0.025 0.040 0.040
0.750–0.999 0.035 0.050 0.050
1.000–1.499 0.045 0.060 0.060
1.500–2.000 ... 0.070 ...
A When outside, inside, and wall thickness dimensions are all specified, standard tolerances are applicable to any two of these dimensions, but not to all three.
B When a dimension tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the
maximum and minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
C The mean wall thickness of other than round tube is the average of two measurements taken opposite each other at approximate center line of tube and perpendicular
to the longitudinal axis of the cross section.
D When dimensions specified are outside and inside, rather than wall thickness itself, the allowable deviation at any point (eccentricity) is 610 % of the mean wall
thickness; 60.060 in. max,6 0.010 in. min.
E The circumscribing circle diameter is the diameter of the smallest circle that will completely enclose the tube.
B 107/B 107M
13
TABLE 10 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Square, Rectangular, Hexagonal, and Octagonal Tubes [Metric]
Tolerance, 6, mmA,B
Allowable Deviation of MeanC Wall
Thickness from Specified Wall Thickness
Allowable Deviation of Wall Thickness at any
Point from Mean Wall ThicknessC (Eccentricity)
Specified Wall
ThicknessD, mm
Difference Between 1⁄2(AA + BB) Difference Between AA and Mean Wall
and Specified Wall Thickness Thickness
Circumscribing Circle Diameter, mmE
0 through
130 Over 130
0 through
130 Over 130
Column 1
Over Through Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
0 1.20 0.13 0.20 0.13 610 % of the mean wall thickness (61.50 mm,
1.20 1.60 0.15 0.23 0.18 max 60.25 mm min)
1.60 3.20 0.18 0.25 0.25
3.20 6.30 0.20 0.38 0.38
6.30 10.00 0.28 0.50 0.64
10.00 12.50 0.36 0.76 0.76
12.50 20.00 0.64 1.00 1.00
20.00 25.00 0.88 1.25 1.25
25.00 35.00 1.15 1.50 1.50
35.00 50.00 ... 1.75 ...
A When outside, inside, and wall thickness dimensions are all specified, standard tolerances are applicable to any two of these dimensions, but not to all three.
B When a dimension tolerance is specified other than as an equal bilateral tolerance, the value of the standard tolerance is that which would apply to the mean of the
maximum and minimum dimensions permissible under the tolerance.
C The mean wall thickness of other than round tube is the average of two measurements taken opposite each other at approximate centerline of tube and perpendicular
to the longitudinal axis of the cross section.
D When dimensions specified are outside and inside, rather than wall thickness itself, the allowable deviation at any point (eccentricity) is 610 % of the mean wall
thickness; 61.50 mm max, 60.25 mm min.
E The circumscribing circle diameter is the diameter of the smallest circle that will completely enclose the tube.
TABLE 11 Straightness Tolerances for Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes in Straight Lengths
Tolerance,A in.
Allowable Deviation from Straight
Product
Specified Dia (Rod);
Specified Width (Bar);
Circumscribing Circle
DiaB (Profiles); Specified
OD or Width (Tube),
in.
Specified Thickness
(Rectangles); Minimum
Thickness (Profiles), in.
In Any Foot or
Less of Length
In Total Length of Piece
Rod; square, hexagonal, and
octagonal bar
all ... 0.0125 0.0125 3 length in ft
Rectangular bar and profiles 1.499 and under 0.094 and under
0.095 and over
0.050
0.0125
0.050 3 length in ft
0.0125 3 length in ft
1.500 and over all 0.0125 0.0125 3 length in ft
Tube 0.500–5.999
6.000 and over
...
...
0.010
0.020
0.010 3 length in ft
0.020 3 length in ft
A When weight of piece on flat surface minimizes deviation.
B The circumscribing circle diameter is the diameter of the smallest circle that will completely enclose the cross section of the extruded product.
B 107/B 107M
14
TABLE 12 Straightness Tolerances for Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes in Straight Lengths [Metric]
Tolerance,A mm
Allowable Deviation from Straight
Product
Specified Dia (Rod);
Specified Width (Bar);
Circumscribing Circle DiaB
(Profiles); Specified OD
or Width (Tube),
mm
Specified Thickness
(Rectangles); Mini-
mum Thickness
(Profiles),
mm
mm in any
metre or
less of
length
mm in total length
of piece
Rod, square, hexagonal, and octagonal bar over 40 thru 80
over 40 thru 80
all
all
1
2
1 3 length in m
2 3 length in m
over 80 all 4 4 3 length in m
Rectangular bar and profiles thru 40 thru 2.50 4 4 3 length in m
over 2.50 1 1 3 length in m
over 40 all 1 1 3 length in m
Tube thru 12.50 all 1 1 3 length in m
over 12.50 all 2 2 3 length in m
A When weight of piece of flat surface minimizes deviation.
B The circumscribing circle diameter is the diameter of the smallest circle that will completely enclose the cross section of the extruded product.
TABLE 13 Twist Tolerances for Bars, Profiles, and Other-Than-Round Tubes A
Tolerance,°
Allowable Deviation from Straight
Specified Width (Bar and Tube);
Circumscribing Circle DiaB
(Profiles), in.
Specified Thickness
(Rectangles);
Minimum Thickness
(Profiles), in.
In Any
Foot or
Less of
Length
In Total Length of Piece
1.499 and under all 1 1° 3 length in ft: 7° max
1.500–2.999 all 1⁄2 1⁄2 ° 3 length in ft: 5° max
3.000 and over all 1⁄4 1⁄4 ° 3 length in ft: 3° max
A Twist is normally measured by placing the extruded section on a flat surface and measuring the maximum distance at any point along its length between the bottom
surface of the section and the flat surface. From this measurement, the deviation from true straightness is subtracted. The remainder is the twist. To convert the standard
twist tolerance (deg) to an equivalent linear value, the tangent of the standard tolerance is multiplied by the width of the surface of the section that is on the flat surface.
B The circumscribing circle diameter is the diameter of the smallest circle that will completely enclose the cross section of the extruded product.
B 107/B 107M
15
TABLE 14 Twist Tolerances for Bars, Profiles, and Other-Than-Round Tubes [Metric] A
Tolerance, °
Allowable Deviation from Straight
Specified Width (Bar and Tube); Circum-
scribing Circle DiaB (Profiles), mm
Specified Thickness
(Rectangles);
Minimum Thickness
(Profiles), mm In Any Metre or
Less of Length
In Total Length of Piece
0 through 40.00 all 3 3° 3 length in m: 7° max
Over 40.00 through 80.00 all 1.5 1.5° 3 length in m: 5° max
Over 80.00 all 0.75 0.75° 3 length in m: 3° max
A Twist is normally measured by placing the extruded section on a flat surface and measuring the maximum distance at any point along its length between the bottom
surface of the section and the flat surface. From this measurement, the deviation from true straightness is subtracted. The remainder is the twist. To convert the standard
twist tolerance (°) to an equivalent linear value, the tangent of the standard tolerance is multiplied by the width of the surface of the section that is on the flat surface.
B The circumscribing circle diameter is the diameter of the smallest circle that will completely enclose the cross section of the extruded product.
TABLE 15 Length
Specified Circumscribing
Circle Diameter (Profiles);
Specified Diameter (Rod);
Specified Width (Bar), in.
Tolerance, in. [mm] Allowable Deviation From
Specified Length
Specified Length, ft [m]
Up
through
12 [4]
Over 12 [4]
through
30 [9]
Over 30 [9]
through
50 [15]
Over
50 [15]
Under 3.000 [79.00] + 1⁄8 [3] + 1⁄4 [6] + 3⁄8 [10] + 1 [25]
3.000–7.999 + 3⁄16 [5] + 5⁄16 [8] + 7⁄16 [11] + 1 [25]
[80.00–199.00] + 1⁄4 [6] + 3⁄8 [10] + 1⁄2 [13] + 1 [25]
8.000 [200.00] and over
TABLE 16 Angularity Tolerances for Bars, Profiles, Other-Than-
Round Tubes, and Wire A
Tolerance, 6, °
Minimum Specified Leg or Metal
Thickness, in.
Ratio:B,C Leg or Surface Length to
Leg or Metal Thickness
1 and less Over 1
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
0.187 [4.9] and under 1 2
0.188–0.749 [5.00–19.9] 1 11⁄2
0.750 [120.00] and over 1 1
A The permissible deviation from specified angle on all other-than-round tubes
shall be 62°.
B When the space between the surfaces forming an angle is all metal, values in
Column 2 apply if the larger surface length to metal thickness ratio is 1 or less.
C When two legs are involved, the one having the larger ratio determines the
applicable column.
TABLE 17 Surface Roughness
Specified Section Thickness, in. [mm]
Allowable Depth of
DefectA, max, in. [mm]
Under 0.064 [1.64] 0.0015 [0.038]
0.064–0.125 [1.65–3.19] 0.002 [0.050]
0.126–0.188 [3.20–4.79] 0.0025 [0.065]
0.189–0.250 [4.80–6.29] 0.003 [0.075]
0.251–0.500 [6.30–12.49] 0.004 [0.100]
0.501 and over [12.50 and over] 0.008 [0.200]
A Includes die lines and handling marks.
TABLE 18 Corner and Fillet Radii Tolerances for Bars, Profiles,
Tubes, and Wire
NOTE—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
Allowable Deviation
from Specified Radius
Difference between radius
A and specified radius
Specified Radius, in. [mm] Tolerance, in. [mm]
Sharp corners 61⁄64 [6 0.40]
0.187 [5.00] and under 61⁄64 [6 0.40]
0.188 [5.01] and over 610 %
B 107/B 107M
16
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. GENERAL INFORMATION
X1.1 The resistance to salt water corrosion of Alloys
AZ31B, AZ61A, ZK40A, and ZK60A is substantially the same
and superior to Alloy M1A. All the alloys have a specific
gravity of about 1.8. Alloy AZ31B has good extrusion charac-
teristics and moderate mechanical properties. Alloy AZ31C has
the same characteristics as Alloy AZ31B except that the
impurity limits are greater. It is used for applications where the
maximum in corrosion resistance is not necessary. Alloy
AZ61A has extrusion characteristics and mechanical properties
intermediate between Alloys AZ31B and AZ80A. Alloy
AZ80A is stronger and harder than AZ61A. Alloy ZK60A
combines high tensile strength with good ductility and has the
highest compressive yield strength of any of the extrusion
alloys. ZK40A possesses high yield strength and has better
extrusion characteristics than ZK60A. Minimum compressive
yield strength values that can be met are given in Table X1.1.
Alloy M1A has the best extrusion characteristics.
X1.2 The yield strength of magnesium alloys is defined as
the stress at which the stress-strain curve deviates 0.2 % from
the modulus line. It may be determined by the “Offset Method”
or the “Extension-Under-Load Method” (the latter is often
referred to as the “Approximate Method Without the Stress-
Strain Diagram”) as described in Test Methods B 557 and
B 557M. In case of dispute, the “Offset Method” shall be used.
The unit deformation values given in Table X1.2 for use with
the “Extension-Under-Load Method” are based on a modulus
of elasticity
E 5 6 500 000 psi@44.8 GPa# (X1.1)
X1.3 Oil finish affords a measurable protection against
tarnish and corrosion during shipment and storage of magne-
sium extrusions.
TABLE 19 Flatness Tolerances for Bars, Profiles, and Other-Than-Round Tubes
Product
Minimum Thickness of
Metal Forming the
Surface, in. [mm]
Tolerance, in. [mm]
In Any 1 in. [25 mm] or
Less of WidthA
Widths Over 1 in. [25 mm]A
Bars and Semi-hollow and Solid Profiles
Hollow Profiles and Tubes
all
0.187 [5.00] and under
0.188 [5.01] and over
0.004 [0.10]
0.006 [0.15]
0.004 [0.10]
0.004 3 width, in. [mm]
0.006 3 width, in. [mm]
0.004 3 width, in. [mm]
A Flatness in the length direction is the same as straightness (Table 11).
TABLE X1.1 Minimum Compressive Yield Strength Values
Alloy and Temper Form Cross-Sectional Area, in.2 [mm2]
Compressive Yield Strength, min
ksi [MPa]
ZK40A-T5 bars, rods, and profiles 4.999 [3250] and under 20.0 [135]
hollow profiles 4.999 [3250] and under 20.0 [135]
ZK60A-F bars, rods, and profiles 1.999 [1300] and under
2.000–2.999 [1301–1950]
3.000–4.999 [1951–3250]
5.000–39.999 [3251–25 800]
27.0
26.0
25.0
20.0
[185]
[180]
[170]
[140]
hollow profiles all 20.0 [140]
ZK60A-T5 bars, rods, and profiles 1.999 [1300] and under
2.000–2.999 [1301–1950]
3.000–4.999 [1951–3250]
30.0
28.0
25.0
[200]
[190]
[170]
hollow profiles all 26.0 [180]
B 107/B 107M
17
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since B 107/B 107M–94 that
may impact the use of this standard.
(1) Replaced terms in Section 3 on Terminology with wording to bring them in line with Specification B 221,
specifically using “profile” to replace “section.”
(2) Replaced 6.2.1 with wording that covers continous casting operations.
(3) In Table 2, replaced “shapes” with “profiles” to make terminology current. Under AZ80A, replaced “shapes”
with “solid–profiles” to clarify that AZ80A is produced only as a solid. Under specified cross-sectional area
column and ZK40A T5 row, the area 4.999 in.2 changed to 3.000 in.2. In the same row tensile strength changed
to 37–[255] and yield strength to 34–[235]. Elongation column ZK60A changed from 4 to 6%.
(4) Deleted 9.2.3 and 9.2.4, since the finish is no longer suppliedby producers.
(5) In Table X1.1, replaced “shapes” with “profiles” under the Form column. Under ther Cross-Sectional Area
column for ZK40A T5 and F, replaced the range with “5.000 [3250] and under.” Under the Compressive Yield
Strength column for ZK40A T5 and F, removed “18” and “[125].”
(6) Added B 666/B 666M to Referenced Documents.
(7) Changed wording in X1.3.
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).
TABLE X1.2 Unit Deformation Values
Alloy
Temper
Yield Strength (0.2 % offset), min Unit Deformation
in./in. (mm/mm)
of
Gage LengthUNS No. ASTM No. ksi [MPa]
M11311 AZ31B F 21.0
22.0
20.0
16.0
[145]
[152]
[138]
[110]
0.0052
0.0054
0.0051
0.0045
M11610 AZ61A F 21.0
24.0
22.0
16.0
[145]
[165]
[152]
[110]
0.0052
0.0057
0.0054
0.0045
M11800 AZ80A F 28.0
27.0
[193]
[186]
0.0063
0.0062
M11800 AZ80A T5 30.0
33.0
[207]
[228]
0.0066
0.0071
M16400 ZK40A T5 36.0
37.0
[248]
[255]
0.0075
0.0077
M16600 ZK60A F 31.0
28.0
[214]
[193]
0.0068
0.0063
M16600 ZK60A T5 36.0
38.0
[248]
[262]
0.0075
0.0078
B 107/B 107M
18
Designation: B 108 – 03
Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 108; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification2 covers aluminum-alloy permanent
mold castings designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 This specification is not intended for aluminum-alloy
permanent mold castings used in aerospace applications.
1.3 Alloy and temper designations are in accordance with
ANSI H35.1. The equivalent unified numbering system alloy
designations are in accordance with Practice E 527.
1.4 For acceptance criteria for inclusion of new aluminum
and aluminum alloys and their properties in this specification,
see Annex A1 and Annex A2.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI values given in parentheses are for
information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the
date of casting purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 179 Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot Form for
Castings from all Casting Processes3
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought3
B 557 Test Methods for Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products3
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products3
B 881 Terminology Relating to Aluminum- and
Magnesium-Alloy Products3
B 917/B 917M Practice for Heat Treatment of Aluminum-
Alloy Castings from All Processes3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum-Base Alloys5
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition5
E 94 Guide for Radiographic Testing6
E 155 Reference Radiographs for Examination of Alumi-
num and Magnesium Castings6
E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination6
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)7
E 607 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
Point-to-Plane Technique, Nitrogen Atmosphere8
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis8
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to-Plane, Unipolar Self-Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge8
2.3 ANSI Standard:
H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Alumi-
num9
2.4 Military Standards:9
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-276 Impregnation of Porous Nonferrous Metal
Castings
NAVSEA Technical Publication S9074-AR-GIB-010/27810
2.5 AMS Specification:
AMS 2771 Heat Treatment of Aluminum Alloy Castings11
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.01 on
Aluminum Alloy Ingots and Castings.
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published September 2003. Originally
approved in 1936. Last previous edition approved in 2001 as B 108 – 01a.
2 For ASME Boiler and Pressure Code application see related SB-108.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
7 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
8 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
9 Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
10 Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094. Attn: NPODS.
11 Available from Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
2.6 Federal Standard:12
Fed Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Refer to Terminology B 881 for definitions
of product terms used in this specification.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, the year, and the revision letter, if applicable),
4.1.2 Alloy (see Section 7 and Table 1),
4.1.3 Temper (see Section 11 and Table 2),
4.1.4 Applicable drawing or part number,
4.1.5 The quantity in either pieces or pounds.
4.2 Additionally, orders for material to this specification
shall include the following information when required by the
purchaser.
4.2.1 Whether yield strength tests are required (see 11.1 and
Table 2, Footnote F),
4.2.2 Whether castings or test bars, or both, are to be
artificially aged for Alloys 705.0-T5, 707.0-T5, and 713.0-T5
(see 11.3),
4.2.3 Whether test specimens cut from castings are required
in addition to or instead of separately cast specimens (seeSections 11, 12.2, 13.2, and 15),
4.2.4 Whether repairs are permissible (see Section 18),
4.2.5 Whether inspection is required at the producer’s
works (see Section 19),
4.2.6 Whether certification is required (see Section 23),
4.2.7 Whether surface requirements will be checked visu-
ally or by observational standards where such standards are
established (see 20.1),
12 Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Limits A,B,C
Alloy Composition, %
ANSID UNS Aluminum Silicon Iron Copper
Manga-
nese
Magne-
sium
Chromium Nickel Zinc Tin Titanium
Other
ElementsE
Each TotalF
204.0 A02040 remainder 0.20 0.35 4.2–5.0 0.10 0.15–0.35 ... 0.05 0.10 0.05 0.15–0.30 0.05 0.15
242.0 A02420 remainder 0.7 1.0 3.5–4.5 0.35 1.2–1.8 0.25 1.7–2.3 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
296.0 remainder 2.0–3.0 1.2 4.0–5.0 0.35 0.05 ... 0.35 0.50 ... 0.25 ... 0.35
308.0 remainder 5.0–6.0 1.0 4.0–5.0 0.50 0.10 ... ... 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
319.0 A03190 remainder 5.5–6.5 1.0 3.0–4.0 0.50 0.10 ... 0.35 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
332.0G A03320 remainder 8.5–10.5 1.2 2.0–4.0 0.50 0.50–1.5 ... 0.50 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
333.0 A03330 remainder 8.0–10.0 1.0 3.0–4.0 0.50 0.05–0.50 ... 0.50 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
336.0G A03360 remainder 11.0–13.0 1.2 0.50–1.5 0.35 0.7–1.3 ... 2.0–3.0 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 ...
354.0 A03540 remainder 8.6–9.4 0.20 1.6–2.0 0.10 0.40–0.6 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
355.0 A03550 remainder 4.5–5.5 0.6H 1.0–1.5 0.50H 0.40–0.6 0.25 ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
C355.0 A33550 remainder 4.5–5.5 0.20 1.0–1.5 0.10 0.40–0.6 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
356.0 A03560 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.6H 0.25 0.35H 0.20–0.45 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
A356.0 A13560 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.25–0.45 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
357.0 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.15 0.05 0.03 0.45–0.6 ... ... 0.05 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
A357.0 A13570 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.40–0.7 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.04–0.20 0.05I 0.15
359.0 A03590 remainder 8.5–9.5 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.50–0.7 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
443.0 A04430 remainder 4.5–6.0 0.8 0.6 0.50 0.05 0.25 ... 0.50 ... 0.25 ... 0.35
B443.0 A24430 remainder 4.5–6.0 0.8 0.15 0.35 0.05 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
A444.0 A14440 remainder 6.5–7.5 0.20 0.10 0.10 0.05 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
513.0G A05130 remainder 0.30 0.40 0.10 0.30 3.5–4.5 ... ... 1.4–2.2 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
535.0 A05350 remainder 0.15 0.15 0.05 0.10–0.25 6.2–7.5 ... ... ... ... 0.10–0.25 0.05J 0.15
705.0 A07050 remainder 0.20 0.8 0.20 0.40–0.6 1.4–1.8 0.20–0.40 ... 2.7–3.3 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
707.0 A07070 remainder 0.20 0.8 0.20 0.40–0.6 1.8–2.4 0.20–0.40 ... 4.0–4.5 ... 0.25 0.05 0.15
711.0G A07110 remainder 0.30 0.7–1.4 0.35–0.65 0.05 0.25–0.45 ... ... 6.0–7.0 ... 0.20 0.05 0.15
713.0 A07130 remainder 0.25 1.1 0.40–1.0 0.6 0.20–0.50 0.35 0.15 7.0–8.0 ... 0.25 0.10 0.25
850.0 A08500 remainder 0.7 0.7 0.7–1.3 0.10 0.10 ... 0.7–1.3 ... 5.5–7.0 0.20 ... 0.30
851.0G A08510 remainder 2.0–3.0 0.7 0.7–1.3 0.10 0.10 ... 0.3–0.7 ... 5.5–7.0 0.20 ... 0.30
852.0G A08520 remainder 0.40 0.7 1.7–2.3 0.10 0.6–0.9 ... 0.9–1.5 ... 5.5–7.0 0.20 ... 0.30
A When single units are shown, these indicate the maximum amounts permitted.
B Analysis shall be made for the elements for which limits are shown in this table.
C The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of determining conformance to these limits, an observed value or a calculated value obtained
from analysis shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit in accordance with the rounding method of
Practice E 29.
D ASTM alloy designations are recorded in Practice B 275.
E Others includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown as well as unlisted metallic elements. The producer may analyze samples for trace elements not
specified in the specification. However, such analysis is not required and may not cover all metallic Others elements. Should any analysis by the producer or the purchaser
establish that an Others element exceeds the limit of Each or that the aggregate of several Others elements exceeds the limit of Total, the material shall be considered
nonconforming.
F Other Elements—Total shall be the sum of unspecified metallic elements 0.010 % or more, rounded to the second decimal before determining the sum.
G 336.0 formerly A332.0, 332.0 formerly F332.0, 513.0 formerly A514.0, 711.0 formerly C712.0, 851.0 formerly A850.0, 852.0 formerly B850.0.
H If the iron content exceeds 0.45 %, manganese content shall not be less than one half of the iron.
I Beryllium 0.04–0.07.
J Beryllium 0.003–0.007, boron 0.005 max.
B 108 – 03
2
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
4.2.8 Whether liquid penetrant inspection is required (see
20.2),
4.2.9 Whether radiographic inspection is required (see
20.3), and
4.2.10 Whether foundry control is required (see 10.2).
4.2.11 Whether Practices B 660 applies and, if so, the levels
of preservation, packaging and packing required (see 24.4).
5. Responsibility for Quality Assurance
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the producer shall be responsible for the performance of
all inspections and test requirements specified herein. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the producer may use his own or any
other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection
and test requirements specified herein. The purchaser shall
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set
forth in the specification where such inspections are deemed
necessary to confirm that material conforms to prescribed
requirements.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The responsibility of furnishing castings that can be laid
out and machined to the finished dimensions within the
permissible variations specified, as shown on the blueprints or
drawings, shall rest with the producer, except where mold
equipment is furnished by the purchaser.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The castings shall conform to the chemical composition
limits prescribed in Table 1. Conformance shall be determined
by the producer by analyzing samples at the time the castings
are poured, or samples taken from castings or tension test
specimens representative of the castings. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the material during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements A,B
Alloy
TemperC
Tensile
Strength, min,
ksi (MPa)D
Yield StrengthE
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi
(MPa)D
Elongation in
2 in. or 4 3
Diameter, min, %
Typical Brinell
HardnessF
500-kgf load,
10-mm ballANSI
G UNS
204.0 A02040 T4 separately cast specimens 48.0 (331) 29.0 (200) 8.0 ...
242.0 A02420 T571 34.0 (234) ... H 105
T61 40.0 (276) ... H 110
296.0 A02960 T4 33.0 (230) 15.0 (105) 4.5 75
T6 35.0 (240) ... 2.0 90
308.0 A03080 F 24.0 (165) ... ... 70
319.0 A03190 F 27.0 (186) 14.0 (97) 2.5 95
332.0I A03320 T5 31.0 (214) ... H 105
333.0 A03330 F 28.0 (193) ... H 90
T5 30.0 (207) ... H 100
T6 35.0 (241) ... H 105
T7 31.0 (214) ... H 90
336.0I A03360 T551 31.0 (214) ... H 105
T65 40.0 (276) ... H 125
354.0 A03540 T61
separately cast specimens 48.0 (331) 37.0 (255) 3.0
casting, designated areaJ 47.0 (324) 36.0 (248) 3.0
castings, no location designatedJ 43.0 (297) 33.0 (228) 2.0
T62
separately cast specimens 52.0 (359) 42.0 (290) 2.0
castings, designated areaJ 50.0 (344) 42.0 (290) 2.0
castings, no location designatedJ 43.0 (297) 33.0 (228) 2.0
355.0 A03550 T51 27.0 (186) ... H 75
T62 42.0 (290) ... H 105
T7 36.0 (248) ... H 90
T71 34.0 (234) 27.0 (186) H 80
C355.0 A33550 T61
separately cast specimens 40.0 (276) 30.0 (207) 3.0 85–90
castings, designated areaJ 40.0 (276) 30.0 (207) 3.0
castings, no location designatedJ 37.0 (255) 30.0 (207)1.0 85
356.0 A03560 F 21.0 (145) 10.0 (69) 3.0
T6 33.0 (228) 22.0 (152) 3.0 85
T71 25.0 (172) ... 3.0 70
A356.0 A13560 T61
separately cast specimens 38.0 (262) 26.0 (179) 5.0 80–90
castings, designated areaJ 33.0 (228) 26.0 (179) 5.0
castings, no location designatedJ 28.0 (193) 26.0 (179) 3.0
357.0 T6 45.0 (310) ... 3.0 ...
A357.0 A13570 T61
separately cast specimens 45.0 (310) 36.0 (248) 3.0 100
castings, designated areaJ 46.0 (317) 36.0 (248) 3.0 ...
castings, no location designatedJ 41.0 (283) 31.0 (214) 3.0 ...
359.0 A03590 T61
separately cast specimens 45.0 (310) 34.0 (234) 4.0 90
B 108 – 03
3
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
TABLE 2 Continued
Alloy
TemperC
Tensile
Strength, min,
ksi (MPa)D
Yield StrengthE
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi
(MPa)D
Elongation in
2 in. or 4 3
Diameter, min, %
Typical Brinell
HardnessF
500-kgf load,
10-mm ballANSI
G UNS
castings, designated areaJ 45.0 (310) 34.0 (234) 4.0
castings, no location designatedJ 40.0 (276) 30.0 (207) 3.0
T62
separately cast specimens 47.0 (324) 38.0 (262) 3.0 100
castings, designated areaJ 47.0 (324) 38.0 (262) 3.0
castings, no location designatedJ 40.0 (276) 30.0 (207) 3.0
443.0 A04430 F 21.0 (145) 7.0 (49) 2.0 45
B443.0 A24430 F 21.0 (145) 6.0 (41) 2.5 45
A444.0 A14440 T4
separately cast specimens 20.0 (138) ... 20 ...
castings, designated areaJ 20.0 (138) ... 20 ...
513.0I A05130 F 22.0 (152) 12.0 (83) 2.5 60
535.0 A05350 F 35.0 (241) 18.0 (124) 8.0 ...
705.0 A07050 T1 or T5 37.0 (255) 17.0 (117) 10.0
707.0 A07070 T1 42.0 (290) 25.0 (173) 4.0
T7 45.0 (310) 35.0 (241) 3.0
711.0I A07110 T1 28.0 (193) 18.0 (124) 7.0 70
713.0 A07130 T1 or T5 32.0 (221) 22.0 (152) 4.0
850.0 A08500 T5 18.0 (124) ... 8.0
851.0I A08510 T5 17.0 (117) ... 3.0
T6 18.0 (124) ... 8.0
852.0I A08520 T5 27.0 (186) ... 3.0
A If agreed upon by manufacturer and the purchaser, other mechanical properties may be obtained by other heat treatments such as annealing, aging, or stress relieving.
B For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded off to the nearest 0.1 ksi, and each
value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 %, both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
C Refer to ANSI H 35.1 for description of tempers.
D SI units for information only. For explanation of the SI Unit “MPa” see Appendix X2.
E Yield strength to be evaluated only when specified in contract or purchase order.
F Hardness values given for information only, not required for acceptance.
G ASTM alloy designations are recorded in Practice B 275.
H Not required.
I 336.0 formerly A332.0, 332.0 formerly F332.0, 513.0 formerly A514.0, 711.0 formerly C712.0, 851.0 formerly A850.0, 852.0 formerly B850.0.
J These properties apply only to castings having section thicknesses not greater than 2 in. except that section thicknesses of 3⁄4 in., max, shall apply to Alloy A444.0.
8. Sampling for Determination of Chemical Composition
8.1 A sample for determination of chemical composition
shall be taken to represent one of the following:
8.1.1 Not more than 4000 lb (1814 kg) of clean castings
(gates and risers removed) or a single casting poured from one
furnace.
8.1.2 The castings poured continuously from one furnace in
not more than eight consecutive hours.
8.2 Samples for determination of chemical composition
shall be taken in accordance with one of the following
methods:
8.2.1 Samples for Chemical Analysis— Samples for chemi-
cal analysis shall be taken by sawing, drilling, or milling the
casting or test specimens in such a manner as to be represen-
tative of the material (Practice E 88). The weight of a prepared
sample shall not be less than 75 g.
8.2.2 Samples for Spectrochemical and Other Methods of
Analysis—Samples for spectrochemical analysis shall be taken
in accordance with Practices E 716. Samples for other methods
of analysis shall be suitable for the form of material being
analyzed and the type of analytical methods used.
9. Methods for Determination of Chemical Composition
9.1 The determination of chemical composition shall be
made in accordance with suitable chemical (Test Methods
E 34), or spectrochemical (Test Methods E 607 and E 1251),
methods. Other methods may be used only when no published
ASTM method is available. In case of dispute, the method of
analysis shall be agreed upon by the producer and the pur-
chaser.
10. Requirements for Castings Produced for
Governmental and Military Agencies
10.1 Material Requirements:
10.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, only aluminum alloy
conforming to the requirements of Specification B 179 or
producers foundry scrap, identified as being made from alloy
conforming to Specification B 179, shall be used in the
remelting furnace from which molten metal is taken for
pouring directly into castings. Additions of small amounts of
modifying and grain refining elements or alloys are permitted.
10.1.2 Pure materials, recycled materials, and master alloys
may be used to make alloys conforming to this specification,
provided chemical analysis can be taken and adjusted to
conform to Table 1 prior to pouring any castings.
10.2 Foundry Control—When specified, castings shall be
produced under foundry control approved by the purchaser.
Foundry control shall consist of examination of castings by
radiographic or other approved methods for determining inter-
nal discontinuities until the gating, pouring, and other foundry
practices have been established to produce castings meeting the
quality standards furnished by the purchaser or agreed upon by
the purchaser and the producer. When foundry practices have
been so established, the production method shall not be
significantly changed without demonstrating to the satisfaction
B 108 – 03
4
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
of the purchaser that the change does not adversely affect the
quality of the castings. Minor changes of650°F (628°C) from
the established nominal temperature are permissible.
11. Tensile Requirements
11.1 The separately cast tension test specimens representing
the castings shall meet the mechanical properties prescribed in
Table 2.
11.2 When specified, the tensile strength and elongation of
test specimens cut from castings shall be in accordance with
Table 2 for Alloys 354.0, C355.0, A356.0, A357.0, and A444.0.
For other alloys a minimum of 75 % of the tensile and yield
strength values and not less than 25 % of the elongation values
specified in Table 2 are required. The measurement of elonga-
tion is not required for test specimens cut from castings if 25%
of the specified minimum elongation value published in Table
2 is 0.5 % or less. If grade D quality castings as described in
Table 3 are specified, no tensile tests shall be specified nor
tensile requirements be met on specimens cut from castings.
11.3 Although Alloys 705.0, 707.0, and 713.0 are most
frequently used in the naturally aged condition, by agreement
of the producer and the purchaser, the castings may be
artificially aged. The producer and the purchaser may also
agree to base the acceptance of castings on artificially aged test
bars. The conditions of artificial aging shown in Practice
B 917/B 917M or AMS 2771 shall be employed unless other
conditions are accepted by mutual consent.
12. Test Specimens
12.1 Separately cast test specimens shall be cast in iron
molds. A recommended gating method is shown in Fig. 1. The
test section of the tension test specimen shall be cast to size in
accordance with the dimensions shown in Fig. 1 and not
machined prior to test. Grip ends may be machined to adapt
them in such a manner as to ensure axial loading.
12.2 When properties of castings are to be determined,
tension test specimens shallbe cut from the locations desig-
nated on the drawings, unless otherwise negotiated. If no
locations are designated, one or more specimens shall be taken
to include locations having significant variation in casting
thickness, except that specimens shall not be taken from areas
directly under risers. The tension test specimens shall be the
standard 0.500-in. diameter specimens shown in Fig. 9 of Test
Methods B 557 or a round specimen of smaller size propor-
tional to the standard specimens. In no case shall the dimen-
sions of the smallest specimen be less than the following:
Diameter of reduced section, 0.250 in.
Length of reduced section, 11⁄4 in.
Radius of fillet, 3⁄16 in.
Diameter of end section, 3⁄8 in.
Overall length:
With shouldered ends, 23⁄8 in.
With threaded ends, 3 in.
With plain cylindical ends, 4 in.
12.3 When necessary, a rectangular specimen may be used
proportional to that shown for the 0.500 in. wide specimen in
Fig. 6 of Test Methods B 557, but in no case shall its
dimensions be less than the following:
Width of reduced section, 1⁄4 in.
Length of reduced section, 11⁄4 in.
Radius of fillet, 1⁄4 in.
Overall length, 4 in.
The specified elongation values shall not apply to tests of
rectangular specimens.
12.4 If the castings are to be heat treated and separately cast
specimens are to be used, the specimens representing such
castings shall be heat treated with the castings they represent.
If castings are to be heat treated and tests are to be obtained on
the castings, the test specimens shall be taken from the castings
after heat treatment.
13. Number of Tests
13.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon by the purchaser and
producer, two tension test specimens shall be separately cast
and tested to represent the following:
13.1.1 Not more than 4000 lb (1814 kg) of clean castings
(gates and risers removed) or a single casting poured from one
furnace.
13.1.2 The castings poured continuously from one furnace
in not more than eight consecutive hours.
13.2 When tensile properties of castings are to be deter-
mined, one per melt-heat combination shall be tested unless
otherwise shown on the drawing or specified in the purchase
order.
TABLE 3 Discontinuity—Level Requirements for Aluminum Castings in Accordance with Reference Radiographs E 155
Grade AA Grade B Grade C Grade D
Section Thickness, in. (mm)
Discontinuity
1⁄4 to 3⁄4
(6.4 to 19.0)
1⁄4
(6.4)
3⁄4
(19.0)
1⁄4
(6.4)
3⁄4
(19.0)
1⁄4
(6.4)
3⁄4
(19.0)
Gas holes none 1 1 2 2 5 5
Gas porosity (round) none 1 1 3 3 7 7
Gas porosity (elongated) none 1 1 3 4 5 5
Shrinkage cavity none 1 B 2 B 3 B
Shrinkage porosity or sponge none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Foreign material (less dense material) none 1 1 2 2 4 4
Foreign material (more dense material) none 1 1 2 1 4 3
Segregation none none none none
Cracks none none none none
Cold shuts none none none none
Surface irregularity
Core shaft
not to exceed drawing tolerance
not to exceed drawing tolerance
A Caution should be exercised in requesting grade A because of the difficulty in obtaining this level.
B No radiographs available.
B 108 – 03
5
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
13.3 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
flaws, it may be discarded, in which case the purchaser and the
producer shall agree upon the selection of a replacement
specimen.
14. Test Methods
14.1 The tensile properties shall be determined in accor-
dance with Test Methods B 557.
15. Retests
15.1 If the results of the tension test do not conform to the
requirements prescribed in Table 2, test bars representative of
the castings may be retested in accordance with the replace-
ment tests and retest provisions of Test Methods B 557 and the
results of retests shall conform to the requirements as to
mechanical properties specified in Table 2.
16. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
16.1 The finished castings shall be uniform in composition
and free of blowholes, cracks, shrinks, and other discontinui-
ties in accordance with standards designated and agreed upon
as acceptable by the purchaser.
17. Heat Treatment
17.1 Heat treatment of castings shall be performed in
accordance with Practice B 917/B 917M or AMS 2771.
18. Repair of Castings
18.1 Castings may be repaired only by processes approved
and agreed upon by the producer and purchaser, such as,
welding, impregnation, peening, blending, soldering, etc.
Nominal draft angle to be 20° on all square or rectangular sections in direction transverse to parting line.
NOTE 1—Test section of test bar: this section to be gradually tapered from the ends towards the center.
FIG. 1 Tension Test Specimen Casting
B 108 – 03
6
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
Limitations on the extent and frequency of such repairs, and
methods of inspection of repaired areas should also be agreed
upon.
18.2 Repairing of Castings Produced for Governmental and
Military Agencies:
18.2.1 Welding:
18.2.1.1 When welding is permitted, it shall be done by
methods suitable for the particular alloy. Welding methods
shall be in accordance with such specifications as are refer-
enced on the applicable drawings, or as are required by the
contract or order.
18.2.1.2 All welding shall be done by qualified welders and
by methods approved by the purchaser.
18.2.1.3 When castings are to be supplied in the heat treated
condition, they shall be heat treated to the required temper after
welding, except that small arc welds may be performed without
subsequent heat treatment upon approval of the purchaser.
18.2.1.4 Unless otherwise specified, castings that have been
repaired by welding shall have the welded areas examined
radiographically after all reworking and heat treatment have
been completed.
18.2.1.5 All welds shall be free from cracks, lack of fusion
and meet the same quality requirements as the parent material.
18.2.1.6 Welded castings shall be marked with a symbol of
three concentric circles with a letter or number designating the
welder adjacent to the symbol. The outer circle of the symbol
shall be no larger than1⁄4 in. (6 mm) in outside diameter. All
welded areas shall be encircled with a ring or white paint prior
to submission for final inspection.
18.2.1.7 Repair welding of castings used in naval shipboard
pressure vessels, piping systems, and machinery shall be
performed in accordance with requirements for repair of
castings specified in NAVSEA Technical Publication S9074-
AR-GIB-010/278.
FIG. 2 Tension Test Specimen Casting (Cross Section)
B 108 – 03
7
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
18.3 Impregnation—When impregnation is permitted, it
shall be to correct general seepage leaks only and shall not be
used to correct poor foundry technique or porosity in excess of
accepted standards. It shall be accomplished in accordance
with MIL-STD-276. Unless otherwise authorized by the pur-
chaser, castings which have been impregnated shall be marked
“IMP”.
18.4 Peening—When peening is permitted, it shall be to
correct localized minor seepage leaks and small surface imper-
fections only, or to disclose subsurface voids for the purpose of
inspection. Peening will not be permitted to repair cracks, cold
shuts, shrinks, misruns, defects due to careless handling, or
other similar major defects. Peening may be accomplished
either hot or cold and shall be performed by methods which are
acceptable to the purchaser. Peened castings shall be marked
with Maltese cross approximately1⁄4 in. (6 mm) high.
18.5 Blending—Blending with suitable grinders or other
tools will be permitted for the removal of surface imperfections
only, and shall not result in dimensions outside the tolerances
shown on theapplicable drawings.
19. Source Inspection
19.1 If the purchaser elects to make an inspection of the
castings at the producer’s works, it shall be so stated in the
contract or order.
19.2 If the purchaser elects to have an inspection made at
the producer’s works, the producer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests and
inspection shall be so conducted as not to interfere unneces-
sarily with the operation of the works.
20. Foundry Inspection
20.1 Requirements such as surface finish, parting line pro-
jections, snagging projections where gates and risers were
removed, etc., may be checked visually. It is advisable to have
agreed upon observational standards representing both accept-
able and unacceptable material.
20.2 Liquid Penetrant Inspection:
20.2.1 When specified, liquid penetrant inspection shall be
in accordance with Test Method E 165, and the required
sensitivity shall be specified.
20.2.2 Acceptance standards for discontinuities shall be
agreed upon, including size and frequency per unit area and
location.
20.3 Radiographic Inspection:
20.3.1 When specified, radiographic inspection shall be in
accordance with Guide E 94 and Reference Radiographs
E 155.
20.3.2 Radiographic acceptance shall be in accordance with
the requirements selected from Table 3. Any modifications of
the table and the frequency per unit area and location of
discontinuities should also be agreed upon.
20.3.3 The number, film size and orientation of radiographs,
and the number of castings radiographically inspected shall be
agreed upon by the producer and purchaser.
21. Identification and Repair Marking for Castings
Produced for Government and Military Agencies
21.1 Identification—Unless otherwise specified, each cast-
ing shall be marked with the applicable drawing or part
number. The marking shall consist of raised Arabic numbers,
and when applicable upper-case letters, cast integral. The
location of the identification marking shall be as specified on
the applicable drawing. When the location is not specified on
the drawing, the drawing or part number, or both, shall be
placed in a location mutually agreeable to the purchaser and
producer.
21.2 Lot Identification—When practical, each casting shall
also be marked with the melt or inspection lot number.
21.3 Lot—A lot shall consist of all of the cleaned castings
poured from the same heat or melt when subsequent heat
treatment is not required.
21.3.1 When the castings consist of alloys that require heat
treatment, the lot shall consist of all castings from the same
melt or heat that have been heat treated in the same furnace
charge, or if heat treated in a continuous furnace, all castings
from the same melt or heat that are discharged from the furnace
during a 4-h period.
21.4 Repair Marking—All identification markings indicat-
ing repairs as specified in 20.1, 20.2, and 20.3 shall be made
with a waterproof marking fluid.
22. Rejection and Rehearing
22.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer promptly and in writing. In case of dissatisfac-
tion with the results of the test, the producer may make claim
for a rehearing.
23. Certification
23.1 The producer shall, upon request, furnish to the pur-
chaser a certificate stating that each lot has been sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification, and
has met the requirements.
24. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
24.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packaging and gross weight of individual containers
shall be left to the discretion of the producer unless otherwise
agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers shall be so
selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical equip-
ment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each package or
container shall contain only one part number, alloy, and temper
of material when packaged for shipment unless otherwise
agreed upon.
24.2 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, part number, quantity, specification
number, alloy and temper, gross and net weights, and the name
of the producer.
24.3 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
B 108 – 03
8
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
24.4 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accor-
dance with the requirement of Practices B 660. The applicable
levels shall be as specified in the contract or order. Marking for
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for military
agencies.
25. Keywords
25.1 aluminum; permanent mold castings
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. BASIS FOR INCLUSION OF PROPERTY LIMITS
A1.1 Limits are established at a level at which a statistical
evaluation of the data indicates that 99 % of the population
obtained from all standard material meets the limit with 95 %
confidence. For the products described, mechanical property
limits for the respective size ranges are based on the analyses
of at least 100 data from standard production material with no
more than ten data from a given lot. All tests are performed in
accordance with the appropriate ASTM test methods. For
informational purposes, refer to “Statistical Aspects of Me-
chanical Property Assurance” in the Related Material section of
the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
A2. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR INCLUSION OF NEW ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOYS IN THIS
SPECIFICATION
A2.1 Prior to acceptance for inclusion in this specification,
the composition of wrought or cast aluminum or aluminum
alloy shall be registered in accordance with ANSI H35.1. The
Aluminum Association13 holds the Secretariat of ANSI H35
Committee and administers the criteria and procedures for
registration.
A2.2 If it is documented that the Aluminum Association
could not or would not register a given composition, an
alternative procedure and the criteria for acceptance shall be as
follows:
A2.2.1 The designation submitted for inclusion does not
utilize the same designation system as described in ANSI
H35.1. A designation not in conflict with other designation
systems or a trade name is acceptable.
A2.2.2 The aluminum or aluminum alloy has been offered
for sale in commercial quantities within the prior twelve
months to at least three identifiable users.
A2.2.3 The complete chemical composition limits are sub-
mitted.
A2.2.4 The composition is, in the judgement of the respon-
sible subcommittee, significantly different from that of any
other aluminum or aluminum alloy already in this specifica-
tion.
A2.2.5 For codification purposes, an alloying element is any
element intentionally added for any purpose other than grain
refinement and for which minimum and maximum limits are
specified. Unalloyed aluminum contains a minimum of
99.00 % aluminum.
A2.2.6 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed to the following decimal places:
Less than 0.001 % 0.000X
0.001 to but less than 0.01 % 0.00X
0.01 to but less than 0.10 %
Unalloyed aluminum made by a refining process 0.0XX
Alloys and unalloyed aluminum not made by a refining
process 0.0X
0.10 through 0.55 % 0.XX
(It is customary to express limits of 0.30 through 0.55 % as
0.X0 or 0.X5)
Over 0.55 % 0.X, X.X, etc.
(Except that combined Si + Fe limits for 99.00 % minimum
aluminum must be expressed as 0.XX or 1.XX)
A2.2.7 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed in the following sequence: Silicon; Iron; Copper;
Manganese; Magnesium; Chromium; Nickel;Zinc (Note
A2.1); Titanium; Other Elements, Each; Other Elements, Total:
Aluminum (Note A2.2).
NOTE A2.1—Additional specified elements having limits are inserted in
alphabetical order of their chemical symbols between zinc and titanium, or
are specified in footnotes.
NOTE A2.2—Aluminum is specified asminimumfor unalloyed alumi-
num and as aremainderfor aluminum alloys.13 The Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006.
B 108 – 03
9
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. PROPERTIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
X1.1 Data in Table X1.1 are approximate and are supplied
for general information only.
X2. METRIC EQUIVALENTS
X2.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa, the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.
B 108 – 03
10
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
TABLE X1.1 Properties and Characteristics
NOTE 1—indicates best of group; 5 indicates poorest of group.
Alloy Foundary Characteristics Other Characteristics
ANSIA UNS
Approximate
Melting Range
°FB
[°C]
Resistance
to Hot
CrackingC
Pressure
Tight-
ness
FluidityD
Solidifi-
cation
Shrinkage
TendencyE
Normally
Heat-
Treated
Resistance
to
CorrosionF
Machin-
ingG
Polish-
ingH
Electro-
platingI
Anodizing
(Appear-
ance)J
Chemical
Oxide
Coating
(Protection)K
Strength at
Elevated
TempL
Suitability
for
WeldingM
Suitable
for
BrazingN
204.0 A02040 985 to 1200
[529-649]
4 3 3 4 yes 4 1 2 1 3 4 1 4 no
242.0 A02420 990 to 1175
[532-635]
4 4 3 4 yes 4 2 2 1 2 3 1 4 no
296.0 A02960 970 to 1170
[521-632]
4 3 3 4 yes 4 1 2 1 3 4 1 4 no
308.0 A03080 970 to 1135
[521-613]
2 2 2 3 yes 4 3 3 2 4 3 3 2 no
319.0 A03190 950 to 1125
[510-607]
2 2 2 3 yes 3 3 3 2 4 3 3 2 no
336.0O A03360 1080 to 1050
[538-566]
1 2 1 3 yes 3 4 5 4 5 2 2 2 no
332.0O A03320 970 to 1080
[521-582]
1 2 1 2 aged only 3 3 4 3 5 3 3 2 no
333.0 A03330 960 to 1085
[516-585]
2 2 2 3 no 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 2 no
354.0 A03540 1015 to 1150
[546-621]
1 1 2 2 yes 3 3 3 2 4 2 2 2 no
355.0 A03550 1015 to 1150
[546-621]
1 1 2 2 yes 3 3 3 2 4 2 2 2 no
C355.0 A33550 1015 to 1150
[546-621]
1 1 2 2 yes 3 3 3 2 4 2 2 2 no
356.0 A03560 1035 to 1135
[557-613]
1 1 2 1 yes 2 3 3 1 4 2 3 2 no
A356.0 A13560 1035 to 1135
[557-613]
1 1 2 1 yes 2 3 3 1 4 2 3 2 no
A357.0 A13570 1035 to 1135
[557-613]
1 1 2 1 yes 2 3 3 1 4 2 3 2 no
359.0 A03590 1035 to 1135
[557-613]
1 1 2 1 yes 2 3 3 1 4 2 3 2 no
443.0 A04430 1065 to 1170
[574-632]
1 1 1 2 no 3 5 4 2 4 2 4 1 ltd
B443.0 A24430 1065 to 1170
[574-632]
1 1 1 2 no 2 5 4 2 4 2 4 1 ltd
A444.0 A14440 1065 to 1145
[574-618]
1 1 1 1 yes 2 5 4 2 4 2 4 1 ltd
513.0O A05130 1075 to 1180
[579-638]
4 5 5 4 no 1 1 1 4 1 1 3 5 no
535.0 A05350 1020 to 1165
[549-629]
4 5 5 5 no 1 1 1 5 1 1 3 4 no
705.0 A07050 1105 to 1180 [596-
638]
5 4 4 5 aged only 2 1 1 3 1 2 5 4 yes
707.0
711.0O
A07070
A07110
1085 to 1165
[585-629]
1120 to 1190 [604-
643]
5
5
4
4
4
4
5
5
yes
aged only
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
5
5
5
4
yes
yes
713.0 A07130 1100 to 1185 [593-
641]
5 4 4 5 aged only 2 1 1 2 1 2 5 4 yes
850.0 A08500 435 to 1200
[224-649]
5 5 5 5 aged only 3 1 1 5 4 5 P 5 no
B
108
–
03
11
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
TA
B
LE
X
1.
1
C
on
tin
ue
d
A
llo
y
F
ou
nd
ar
y
C
ha
ra
ct
er
is
tic
s
O
th
er
C
ha
ra
ct
er
is
tic
s
A
N
S
IA
U
N
S
A
pp
ro
xi
m
at
e
M
el
tin
g
R
an
ge
°F
B
[°
C
]
R
es
is
ta
nc
e
to
H
ot
C
ra
ck
in
gC
P
re
ss
ur
e
Ti
gh
t-
ne
ss
F
lu
id
ity
D
S
ol
id
ifi
-
ca
tio
n
S
hr
in
ka
ge
Te
nd
en
cy
E
N
or
m
al
ly
H
ea
t-
Tr
ea
te
d
R
es
is
ta
nc
e
to
C
or
ro
si
on
F
M
ac
hi
n-
in
gG
P
ol
is
h-
in
gH
E
le
ct
ro
-
pl
at
in
gI
A
no
di
zi
ng
(A
pp
ea
r-
an
ce
)J
C
he
m
ic
al
O
xi
de
C
oa
tin
g
(P
ro
te
ct
io
n)
K
S
tr
en
gt
h
at
E
le
va
te
d
Te
m
pL
S
ui
ta
bi
lit
y
fo
r
W
el
di
ng
M
S
ui
ta
bl
e
fo
r
B
ra
zi
ng
N
85
1.
0O
A
08
51
0
44
0
to
11
65
[2
27
-6
29
]
4
4
5
4
ye
s
3
1
1
5
4
5
P
5
no
85
2.
0O
A
08
52
0
40
0
to
11
75
[2
04
-6
35
]
5
5
5
5
ag
ed
3
1
1
5
4
5
P
5
no
A
A
S
T
M
al
lo
y
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
ar
e
re
co
rd
ed
in
P
ra
ct
ic
e
B
27
5.
B
Te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
of
so
lid
us
an
d
liq
ui
du
s
ar
e
in
di
ca
te
d,
po
ur
in
g
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
w
ill
be
hi
gh
er
.
C
A
bi
lit
y
of
al
lo
y
to
w
ith
st
an
d
st
re
ss
es
fr
om
co
nt
ra
ct
io
n
w
hi
le
co
ol
in
g
th
ro
ug
h
ho
t-
sh
or
t
or
br
itt
le
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
ra
ng
e.
D
A
bi
lit
y
of
liq
ui
d
al
lo
y
to
flo
w
re
ad
ily
in
m
ol
d
an
d
fil
lt
hi
n
se
ct
io
ns
.
E
D
ec
re
as
e
in
vo
lu
m
e
ac
co
m
pa
ny
in
g
fr
ee
zi
ng
of
al
lo
y
an
d
m
ea
su
re
of
am
ou
nt
of
co
m
pe
ns
at
in
g
fe
ed
m
et
al
re
qu
ire
d
in
fo
rm
of
ris
er
s.
F
B
as
ed
on
re
si
st
an
ce
of
al
lo
y
in
st
an
da
rd
ty
pe
sa
lt-
sp
ra
y
te
st
.
G
C
om
po
si
te
ra
tin
g
ba
se
d
on
ea
se
of
cu
tti
ng
,c
hi
p
ch
ar
ac
te
ris
tic
s,
qu
al
ity
of
fin
is
h,
an
d
to
ol
lif
e.
R
at
in
gs
,i
n
th
e
ca
se
of
he
at
-t
re
at
ab
le
al
lo
ys
,b
as
ed
on
T
6
te
m
pe
r.
O
th
er
te
m
pe
rs
,p
ar
tic
ul
ar
ly
th
e
an
ne
al
ed
te
m
pe
r,
m
ay
ha
ve
lo
w
er
ra
tin
g.
H
C
om
po
si
te
ra
tin
g
ba
se
d
on
ea
se
an
d
sp
ee
d
of
po
lis
hi
ng
an
d
qu
al
ity
of
fin
is
h
pr
ov
id
ed
by
ty
pi
ca
lp
ol
is
hi
ng
pr
oc
ed
ur
e.
I
A
bi
lit
y
of
ca
st
in
g
to
ta
ke
an
d
ho
ld
an
el
ec
tr
op
la
te
ap
pl
ie
d
by
pr
es
en
t
st
an
da
rd
m
et
ho
ds
.
J
R
at
es
of
lig
ht
ne
ss
of
co
lo
r,
br
ig
ht
ne
ss
,
an
d
un
ifo
rm
ity
of
cl
ea
r
an
od
iz
ed
co
at
in
g
ap
pl
ie
d
in
su
lfu
ric
ac
id
el
ec
tr
ol
yt
e.
K
R
at
ed
on
co
m
bi
ne
d
re
si
st
an
ce
of
co
at
in
g
an
d
ba
se
al
lo
y
to
co
rr
os
io
n.
L
R
at
in
g
ba
se
d
on
te
ns
ile
an
d
yi
el
d
st
re
ng
th
s
at
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
up
to
50
0°
F,
af
te
r
pr
ol
on
ge
d
he
at
in
g
at
te
st
in
g
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
.
M
B
as
ed
on
ab
ili
ty
of
m
at
er
ia
lt
o
be
fu
si
on
-w
el
de
d
w
ith
fil
le
r
ro
d
or
sa
m
e
al
lo
y.
N
R
ef
er
s
to
su
ita
bi
lit
y
of
al
lo
y
to
w
ith
st
an
di
ng
br
az
in
g
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s
w
ith
ou
t
ex
ce
ss
iv
e
di
st
or
tio
n
or
m
el
tin
g.
O
33
6.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
A
33
2.
0,
33
2.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
F
33
2.
0,
51
3.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
A
51
4.
0,
71
1.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
C
71
2.
0,
85
1.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
A
85
0.
0,
85
2.
0
fo
rm
er
ly
B
85
0.
0.
P
N
ot
re
co
m
m
en
de
d
fo
r
se
rv
ic
e
at
el
ev
at
ed
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
s.
B 108 – 03
12
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
X3. INACTIVE ALLOYS
X3.1 Alloys listed as inactive by the Aluminum
Association—208.0 and 222.0. Listing the composition limits,
mechanical properties, and characteristics of the alloys is a
methodof preserving this data should it be needed at some
future date.
TABLE X3.1 Chemical Composition Limits–Inactive Alloys
NOTE 1—All applicable notes and footnotes can be found in Table 1
Alloy
Aluminum
Composition, % Other Elements
ANSI UNS Silicon Iron Copper
Man-
ganese
Magne-
sium
Chromium Nickel Zinc Tin Titanium Each Total
208.0 A02080 remainder 2.5-3.5 1.2 3.5-4.5 0.50 0.10 ... 0.35 1.0 ... 0.25 ... 0.50
222.0 A02220 remainder 2.0 1.5 9.2-10.7 0.50 0.15-0.35 ... 0.50 0.8 ... 0.25 ... 0.35
TABLE X3.2 Tensile Requirements (Inch-Pound Units)–Inactive Alloys
NOTE 1—All applicable notes and footnotes can be found in Table 2.
Alloy
Temper
Tensile Strength,
min, ksi
Yield Strength
(0.2 % offset),
min, ksi (MPa)
Elongation in
2 in. or 4 x
diameter, min, %
Typical Brinell Hard-
ness, 500 kgf, 10
mmANSI UNS
208.0 A02080 F 19.0 (131) 120 (83) 1.5 55
222.0 A02220 O 23.0 (159) 80
T6 30.0 (207) 115
B 108 – 03
13
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
TABLE X3.3 Properties and Characteristics–Inactive Alloys
NOTE 1—1 indicates best of group, 5 indicates poorest of group.
NOTE 2—All applicable notes and footnotes can be found in Table X1.1.
Alloy Pattern
Shrinkage
Allowance,A
in./ft
[mm/m]
Approximate Melting
Range,B °F [°C]
Resist-
ance to
Hot
Crack-
ingG
Pressure
Tightness
Fluid-
ityC
Solidi-
fication
Shrink-
age
Tend-
encyD
Normally
Heat
Treated
Resist-
ance to
Corro-
sionE
Machin-
ingF
Polish-
ingH
Electro-
platingI
Anodiz-
ing (Ap-
pear-
ance)J
Chemical
Oxide
Coating
(Protec-
tion)A
Strength
at Ele-
vated
Tempera-
tureB
Suitabil-
ity for
Weld-
ingC
Suitabil-
ity for
BrazingD
ANSIF UNS
208.0 A02080 5⁄32 [13] 970-1160 [521-627] 2 2 2 2 yes 4 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 no
222.0 A02220 5⁄32 [13] 965-1155 [518-624] 3 3 3 3 yes 4 1 2 1 3 4 1 4 no
B
108
–
03
14
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 108 – 01a) that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved June 10, 2003.)
(1) Replaced reference to Practice B 597 with reference to
Practice B 917/B 917M.
(2) Added new paragraph 1.2.
(3) Revised paragraphs 11.3 and 17.1.
(4) Updated the Referenced Documents section.
(5) Added Terminology B 881 to Referenced Documents and
to paragraph 3.1.
(6) Removed alloys 208.0, 213.0, and 222.0 from Table 1,
Table 2, and Table X1.1 and placed them in “Inactive Alloys”
tables in X3.1.
(7) Removed MIL-STD-278 from 18.2.1.7 and replaced with
NAVSEA Technical Publication S9074-AR-GIB-010/278.
(8) Removed MIL-I-13857 from 2.5 and 18.3.
(9) Added SI units to Table X1.1 for “Approximate Melting
Range.”
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
B 108 – 03
15
NOTICE: This standard has either been superceded and replaced by a new version or discontinued. 
Contact ASTM International (www.astm.org) for the latest information. 
Designation: B 179 – 03
Standard Specification for
Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and Molten Forms for Castings
from All Casting Processes1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 179; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification covers commercial aluminum alloys
in ingot form for remelting and molten form for the manufac-
ture of castings. The specific gravity of these alloys does not
exceed 3.0 and they are designated as shown in Tables 1 and 2.
NOTE 1—Throughout this specification the use of “ingot” in a general
sense includes sow, T-bar, T-ingot, and pig.
1.2 Alloy designations are in accordance with ANSI H35.1.
The equivalent Unified Numbering System alloy designations
are in accordance with Practice E 527.
NOTE 2—Supplementary data pertaining to the alloys covered by this
specification when used in the form of castings are given in Specifications
B 26/B 26M, B 85, B 108, B 618, and B 686.
1.3 For acceptance criteria for inclusion of new aluminum
and aluminum alloys in this specification, see Annex A1.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 26/B26M Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Cast-
ings2
B 85 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings2
B 108 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold
Castings2
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 618 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Investment Cast-
ings2
B 666/B 666M Practice for Identification Marking of Alu-
minum and Magnesium Products2
B 686 Specification for Aluminum Alloy Castings, High-
Strength2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum Base Alloys4
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition4
E 101 Test Method for Spectrographic Analysis of Alumi-
num and Aluminum Alloys by the Point-to-Plane Tech-
nique5
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)6
E 607 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
Point-to-Plane Technique, Nitrogen Atmosphere4
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis4
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to-Plane, Unipolar Self-Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge4
2.2 ANSI Standard:
H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Alumi-
num2
3. Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
3.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, the year, and the revision letter, if applicable),
3.1.2 Alloy (Section 6, Tables 1 and 2), and
3.1.3 The quantity in pieces or pounds.
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.01 on
Aluminum Alloy Ingots and Castings.
Current edition approved April 10, 2003. Published September 2003.Originally
approved in 1946. Last previous edition approved in 1996 as B 179 – 96.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
5 Discontinued. See 1995 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
1
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
TA
B
L
E
1
C
h
em
ic
al
C
o
m
p
o
si
ti
o
n
L
im
it
s
fo
r
A
llo
ys
N
o
rm
al
ly
U
se
d
in
S
an
d
an
d
P
er
m
an
en
t
M
o
ld
C
as
ti
n
g
P
ro
ce
ss
es
N
O
T
E
1—
W
he
re
si
ng
le
un
its
ar
e
sh
ow
n,
th
es
e
in
di
ca
te
th
e
m
ax
im
um
am
ou
nt
s
pe
rm
itt
ed
.
N
O
T
E
2—
A
na
ly
si
s
sh
al
l
be
m
ad
e
fo
r
th
e
el
em
en
ts
fo
r
w
hi
ch
lim
its
ar
e
sh
ow
n
in
th
is
ta
bl
e.
N
O
T
E
3—
T
he
fo
llo
w
in
g
ap
pl
ie
s
to
al
l
sp
ec
ifi
ed
lim
its
in
th
is
ta
bl
e:
Fo
r
pu
rp
os
es
of
de
te
rm
in
in
g
co
nf
or
m
an
ce
to
th
es
e
lim
its
,a
n
ob
se
rv
ed
va
lu
e
or
a
ca
lc
ul
at
ed
va
lu
e
ob
ta
in
ed
fr
om
an
al
ys
is
sh
al
l
be
ro
un
de
d
to
th
e
ne
ar
es
t
un
it
in
th
e
la
st
ri
gh
t-
ha
nd
pl
ac
e
of
fig
ur
es
us
ed
in
ex
pr
es
si
ng
th
e
sp
ec
ifi
ed
lim
it
in
ac
co
rd
an
ce
w
ith
th
e
ro
un
di
ng
-o
ff
m
et
ho
d
of
Pr
ac
tic
e
E
29
.
A
llo
yA
U
se
B
C
om
po
si
tio
n,
%
S
ili
co
n
Ir
on
C
op
pe
r
M
an
ga
ne
se
M
ag
ne
si
um
C
hr
om
iu
m
N
ic
ke
l
Z
in
c
Ti
n
Ti
ta
ni
um
O
th
er
sC
A
lu
m
in
um
A
N
S
IA
U
N
S
E
ac
h
To
ta
lD
20
1.
2
A
02
01
2
S
0.
10
0.
10
4.
0–
5.
2
0.
20
–0
.5
0
0.
20
–0
.5
5
...
...
...
...
0.
15
–0
.3
5
0.
05
E
0.
10
re
m
ai
nd
er
20
4.
2
A
02
04
2
S
,P
0.
15
0.
10
–0
.2
0
4.
2–
4.
9
0.
05
0.
20
–0
.3
5
...
0.
03
0.
05
0.
05
0.
15
–0
.2
5
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
24
2.
1
A
02
42
1
S
,P
0.
7
0.
8
3.
5–
4.
5
0.
35
1.
3–
1.
8
0.
25
1.
7–
2.
3
0.
35
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
24
2.
2
A
02
42
2
S
,P
0.
6
0.
6
3.
5–
4.
5
0.
10
1.
3–
1.
8
...
1.
7–
2.
3
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
24
2.
1
A
12
42
1
S
0.
6
0.
6
3.
7–
4.
5
0.
10
1.
3–
1.
7
0.
15
–0
.2
5
1.
8–
2.
3
0.
10
...
0.
07
–0
.2
0
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
24
2.
2
A
12
42
2
S
0.
35
0.
6
3.
7–
4.
5
0.
10
1.
3–
1.
7
0.
15
–0
.2
5
1.
8–
2.
3
0.
10
...
0.
07
–0
.2
0
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
29
5.
1
A
02
95
1
S
0.
7–
1.
5
0.
8
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
35
0.
03
...
...
0.
35
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
29
5.
2
A
02
95
2
S
0.
7–
1.
2
0.
8
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
30
0.
03
...
...
0.
30
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
29
6.
1
...
P
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
9
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
35
0.
05
...
0.
35
0.
50
...
0.
25
...
0.
35
re
m
ai
nd
er
29
6.
2
...
P
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
8
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
30
0.
03
...
...
0.
30
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
30
8.
1
A
03
08
1
P
5.
0–
6.
0
0.
8
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
50
0.
10
...
...
1.
0
...
0.
25
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
30
8.
2
A
03
08
2
P
5.
0–
6.
0
0.
8
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
30
0.
10
...
...
0.
50
...
0.
20
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
31
9.
1
A
03
19
1
S
,P
5.
5–
6.
5
0.
8
3.
0–
4.
0
0.
50
0.
10
...
0.
35
1.
0
...
0.
25
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
31
9.
2
A
03
19
2
S
,P
5.
5–
6.
5
0.
6
3.
0–
4.
0
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
20
...
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
32
8.
1
A
03
28
1
S
7.
5–
8.
5
0.
8
1.
0–
2.
0
0.
20
–0
.6
0.
25
–0
.6
0.
35
0.
25
1.
5
...
0.
25
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
33
2.
1F
A
03
32
1
P
8.
5–
10
.5
0.
9
2.
0–
4.
0
0.
50
0.
6–
1.
5
...
0.
50
1.
0
...
0.
25
...
re
m
ai
nd
er
33
2.
2F
A
03
32
2
P
8.
5–
10
.0
0.
6
2.
0–
4.
0
0.
10
0.
9–
1.
3
...
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
33
3.
1
A
03
33
1
P
8.
0–
10
.0
0.
8
3.
0–
4.
0
0.
50
0.
10
–0
.5
0
...
0.
50
1.
0
...
0.
25
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
33
6.
1F
A
03
36
1
P
11
.0
–1
3.
0
0.
9
0.
50
–1
.5
0.
35
0.
8–
1.
3
...
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
35
...
...
0.
30
re
m
ai
nd
er
33
6.
2F
A
03
36
2
P
11
.0
–1
3.
0
0.
9
0.
50
–1
.5
0.
10
0.
9–
1.
3
...
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
10
...
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
4.
1
A
03
54
1
P
8.
6–
9.
4
0.
15
1.
6–
2.
0
0.
10
0.
45
–0
.6
...
...
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
5.
1
A
03
55
1
S
,P
4.
5–
5.
5
0.
50
G
1.
0–
1.
5
0.
50
G
0.
45
–0
.6
0.
25
...
0.
35
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
5.
2
A
03
55
2
S
,P
4.
5–
5.
5
0.
14
–0
.2
5
1.
0–
1.
5
0.
05
0.
50
–0
.6
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
C
35
5.
2
A
33
55
2
S
,P
4.
5–
5.
5
0.
13
1.
0–
1.
5
0.
05
0.
50
–0
.6
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
6.
1
A
03
56
1
S
,P
6.
5–
7.
5
0.
50
G
0.
25
0.
35
G
0.
25
–0
.4
5
...
...
0.
35
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
6.
2
A
03
56
2
S
,P
6.
5–
7.
5
0.
13
–0
.2
5
0.
10
0.
05
0.
30
–0
.4
5
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
35
6.
2
A
13
56
2
S
,P
6.
5–
7.
5
0.
12
0.
10
0.
05
0.
30
–0
.4
5
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
7.
1
A
03
57
1
P
6.
5–
7.
5
0.
12
0.
05
0.
03
0.
45
–0
.6
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
35
7.
2
A
13
57
0
P
6.
5–
7.
5
0.
12
0.
10
0.
05
0.
45
–0
.7
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
04
–0
.2
0
0.
03
H
0.
10
re
m
ai
nd
er
35
9.
2
A
03
59
2
P
8.
5–
9.
5
0.
12
0.
10
0.
10
0.
55
–0
.7
...
...
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
44
3.
1
A
04
43
1
S
,P
4.
5–
6.
0
0.
6
0.
6
0.
50
0.
05
0.
25
...
0.
50
...
0.
25
...
0.
35
re
m
ai
nd
er
44
3.
2
A
04
43
2
S
,P
4.
5–
6.
0
0.
6
0.
10
0.
10
0.
05
...
...
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
B
44
3.
1
A
24
43
1
S
,P
4.
5–
6.
0
0.
6
0.
15
0.
35
0.
05
...
...
0.
35
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
44
4.
2
A
14
44
2
P
6.
5–
7.
5
0.
12
0.
05
0.
05
0.
05
...
...
0.
05
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
51
3.
2F
A
05
13
2
P
0.
30
0.
30
0.
10
0.
10
3.
6–
4.
5
...
...
1.
4–
2.
2
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
51
4.
1
A
05
14
1
S
0.
35
0.
40
0.
15
0.
35
3.
6–
4.
5
...
...
0.
15
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
51
4.
2
A
05
14
2
S
0.
30
0.
30
0.
10
0.
10
3.
6–
4.
5
...
...
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
52
0.
2
A
05
20
2
S
0.
15
0.
20
0.
20
0.
10
9.
6–
10
.6
...
...
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
53
5.
2
A
05
35
2
S
,P
0.
10
0.
10
0.
05
0.
10
–0
.2
5
6.
6–
7.
5
...
...
...
...
0.
10
–0
.2
5
0.
05
I
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
70
5.
1
A
07
05
1
S
,P
0.
20
0.
6
0.
20
0.
40
–0
.6
1.
5–
1.
8
0.
20
–0
.4
0
...
2.
7–
3.
3
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
70
7.
1
A
07
07
1
S
,P
0.
20
0.
6
0.
20
0.
40
–0
.6
1.
9–
2.
4
0.
20
–0
.4
0
...
4.
0–
4.
5
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
71
0.
1F
A
07
10
1
S
0.
15
0.
40
0.
35
–0
.6
5
0.
05
0.
65
–0
.8
...
...
6.
0–
7.
0
...
0.
25
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
71
1.
1F
A
07
11
1
P
0.
30
0.
7–
1.
1
0.
35
–0
.6
5
0.
05
0.
30
–0
.4
5
...
...
6.
0–
7.
0
...
0.
20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
71
2.
2F
A
07
12
2
S
0.
15
0.
40
0.
25
0.
10
0.
50
–0
.6
5
0.
40
–0
.6
...
5.
0–
6.
5
...
0.
15
–0
.2
5
0.
05
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
71
3.
1
A
07
13
1
S
,P
0.
25
0.
8
0.
40
–1
.0
0.
6
0.
25
–0
.5
0
0.
35
0.
15
7.
0–
8.
0
...
0.
25
0.
10
0.
25
re
m
ai
nd
er
77
1.
2
A
07
71
2
S
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
0.
85
–1
.0
0.
06
–0
.2
0
...
6.
5–
7.
5
...
0.
10
–0
.20
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
85
0.
1
A
08
50
1
S
,P
0.
7
0.
50
0.
7–
1.
3
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
7–
1.
3
...
5.
5–
7.
0
0.
20
...
0.
30
re
m
ai
nd
er
85
1.
1F
A
08
51
1
S
,P
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
50
0.
7–
1.
3
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
30
–0
.7
...
5.
5–
7.
0
0.
20
...
0.
30
re
m
ai
nd
er
B 179 – 03
2
TA
B
L
E
1
C
on
tin
ue
d
A
llo
yA
U
se
B
C
om
po
si
tio
n,
%
S
ili
co
n
Ir
on
C
op
pe
r
M
an
ga
ne
se
M
ag
ne
si
um
C
hr
om
iu
m
N
ic
ke
l
Z
in
c
Ti
n
Ti
ta
ni
um
O
th
er
sC
A
lu
m
in
um
A
N
S
IA
U
N
S
E
ac
h
To
ta
lD
85
2.
1F
A
08
52
1
S
,P
0.
40
0.
50
1.
7–
2.
3
0.
10
0.
7–
0.
9
...
0.
9–
1.
5
...
5.
5–
7.
0
0.
20
...
0.
30
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
A
S
T
M
al
lo
y
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
ar
e
re
co
rd
ed
in
P
ra
ct
ic
e
B
27
5.
B
S
=
sa
nd
ca
st
.
P
=
pe
rm
an
en
t
m
ol
d
ca
st
.
C
“O
th
er
s”
in
cl
ud
es
lis
te
d
el
em
en
ts
fo
r
w
hi
ch
no
sp
ec
ifi
c
lim
it
is
sh
ow
n
as
w
el
la
s
un
lis
te
d
m
et
al
lic
el
em
en
ts
.
T
he
pr
od
uc
er
m
ay
an
al
yz
e
sa
m
pl
es
fo
r
tr
ac
e
el
em
en
ts
no
t
sp
ec
ifi
ed
in
th
e
sp
ec
ifi
ca
tio
n.
H
ow
ev
er
,
su
ch
an
al
ys
is
is
no
t
re
qu
ire
d
an
d
m
ay
no
t
co
ve
r
al
lm
et
al
lic
“O
th
er
s”
el
em
en
ts
.
S
ho
ul
d
an
y
an
al
ys
is
by
th
e
pr
od
uc
er
or
th
e
pu
rc
ha
se
r
es
ta
bl
is
h
th
at
an
“O
th
er
s”
el
em
en
t
ex
ce
ed
s
th
e
lim
it
of
“
E
ac
h”
or
th
at
th
e
ag
gr
eg
at
e
of
se
ve
ra
l“
O
th
er
s”
el
em
en
ts
ex
ce
ed
s
th
e
lim
it
of
“T
ot
al
,”
th
e
m
at
er
ia
ls
ha
ll
be
co
ns
id
er
ed
no
nc
on
fo
rm
in
g.
D
O
th
er
E
le
m
en
ts
—
To
ta
ls
ha
ll
be
th
e
su
m
of
un
sp
ec
ifi
ed
m
et
al
lic
el
em
en
ts
0.
01
0
%
or
m
or
e,
ro
un
de
d
to
th
e
se
co
nd
de
ci
m
al
be
fo
re
de
te
rm
in
in
g
th
e
su
m
.
E
S
ilv
er
0.
40
–1
.0
%
.
F
33
6.
1
fo
rm
er
ly
A
33
2.
1,
33
6.
2
fo
rm
er
ly
A
33
2.
2,
33
2.
1
fo
rm
er
ly
F
33
2.
1,
33
2.
2
fo
rm
er
ly
F
33
2.
2,
51
3.
2
fo
rm
er
ly
A
51
4.
2,
71
0.
1
fo
rm
er
ly
A
71
2.
1,
71
1.
1
fo
rm
er
ly
C
71
2.
1,
71
2.
2
fo
rm
er
ly
D
71
2.
2,
85
1.
1
fo
rm
er
ly
A
85
0.
1,
85
2.
1
fo
rm
er
ly
B
85
0.
1.
G
If
iro
n
ex
ce
ed
s
0.
45
%
,
m
an
ga
ne
se
sh
al
ln
ot
be
le
ss
th
an
on
e
ha
lf
of
th
e
iro
n
co
nt
en
t.
H
B
er
yl
liu
m
0.
04
–0
.0
7
%
.
I
B
er
yl
liu
m
0.
00
3–
0.
00
7
%
,
bo
ro
n
0.
00
2
%
m
ax
.
B 179 – 03
3
TA
B
L
E
2
C
h
em
ic
al
C
o
m
p
o
si
ti
o
n
L
im
it
s
fo
r
A
llo
ys
N
o
rm
al
ly
U
se
d
in
th
e
D
ie
C
as
ti
n
g
P
ro
ce
ss
N
O
T
E
1—
W
he
re
si
ng
le
un
its
ar
e
sh
ow
n,
th
es
e
in
di
ca
te
th
e
m
ax
im
um
am
ou
nt
s
pe
rm
itt
ed
.
N
O
T
E
2—
A
na
ly
si
s
sh
al
l
be
m
ad
e
fo
r
th
e
el
em
en
ts
fo
r
w
hi
ch
lim
its
ar
e
sh
ow
n
in
th
is
ta
bl
e.
N
O
T
E
3—
T
he
fo
llo
w
in
g
ap
pl
ie
s
to
al
l
sp
ec
ifi
ed
lim
its
in
th
e
ta
bl
e:
Fo
r
pu
rp
os
es
of
ac
ce
pt
an
ce
or
re
je
ct
io
n
an
ob
se
rv
ed
va
lu
e
or
a
ca
lc
ul
at
ed
va
lu
e
ob
ta
in
ed
fr
om
an
al
ys
is
sh
ou
ld
be
ro
un
de
d
to
th
e
ne
ar
es
t
un
it
in
th
e
la
st
ri
gh
t-
ha
nd
pl
ac
e
of
fig
ur
es
us
ed
in
ex
pr
es
si
ng
th
e
sp
ec
ifi
ed
lim
it.
A
llo
yA
C
om
po
si
tio
n,
%
S
ili
co
n
Ir
on
C
op
pe
r
M
an
-
ga
ne
se
M
ag
ne
-
si
um
C
hr
o-
m
iu
m
N
ic
ke
l
Z
in
c
Ti
n
Ti
ta
-
ni
um
O
th
er
E
le
m
en
ts
B
A
lu
m
in
um
A
N
S
IA
A
S
T
M
A
U
N
S
A
E
ac
h
To
ta
lC
10
0.
1
...
A
01
00
1
0.
15
0.
6–
0.
8
0.
10
D
...
D
...
0.
05
...
D
0.
03
D
0.
10
99
.0
0E
13
0.
1
...
A
01
30
1
F
F
0.
10
D
...
D
...
0.
05
...
D
0.
03
D
0.
10
99
.3
0E
15
0.
1
99
.5
A
A
01
50
1
G
G
0.
05
D
...
D
...
0.
05
...
D
0.
03
D
0.
10
99
.5
0E
17
0.
1
...
A
01
70
1
H
H
...
D
...
D
...
0.
05
...
D
0.
03
D
0.
10
99
.7
0E
36
0.
2
S
G
10
0C
A
03
60
2
9.
0–
10
.0
0.
7–
1.
1
0.
10
0.
10
0.
45
–0
.6
...
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
...
...
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
36
0.
1
S
G
10
0A
-B
A
13
60
1
9.
0–
10
.0
1.
0
0.
6
0.
35
0.
45
–0
.6
...
0.
50
0.
40
0.
15
...
...
0.
25
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
36
0.
2
...
A
13
60
2
9.
0–
10
.0
0.
6
0.
10
0.
05
0.
45
–0
.6
...
...
0.
05
...
...
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
38
0.
2
S
C
84
C
A
03
80
2
7.
5–
9.
5
0.
7–
1.
1
3.
0–
4.
0
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
...
...
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
38
0.
1
S
C
84
A
-B
A
13
80
1
7.
5–
9.
5
1.
0
3.
0–
4.
0
0.
50
0.
10
...
0.
50
2.
9
0.
35
...
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
38
0.
2
...
A
13
80
2
7.
5–
9.
5
0.
6
3.
0–
4.
0
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
10
0.
10
...
...
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
38
3.
1
S
C
10
2A
A
03
83
1
9.
5–
11
.5
0.
6–
1.
0
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
50
0.
10
...
0.
30
2.
9
0.
15
...
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
38
3.
2
...
A
03
83
2
9.
5–
11
.5
0.
6–
1.
0
2.
0–
3.
0
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
...
...
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
38
4.
1
S
C
11
4A
A
03
84
1
10
.5
–1
2.
0
1.
0
3.
0–
4.
5
0.
50
0.
10
...
0.
50
2.
9
0.
35
...
...
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
38
4.
2
...
A
03
84
2
10
.5
–1
2.
0
0.
6–
1.
0
3.
0–
4.
5
0.
10
0.
10
...
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
...
...
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
39
0.
2
S
C
17
4A
A
03
90
2
16
.0
–1
8.
0
0.
6–
1.
0
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
10
0.
50
–0
.6
5
...
...
0.
10
...
0.
20
0.
10
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
B
39
0.
1
S
C
17
4B
A
23
90
1
16
.0
–1
8.
0
1.
0
4.
0–
5.
0
0.
50
0.
50
–0
.6
5
...
0.
10
1.
4
...
0.
20
0.
10
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
39
2.
1
S
19
A
03
92
1
18
.0
–2
0.
0
1.
1
0.
40
–0
.8
0.
20
–0
.6
0.
9–
1.
2
...
0.
50
0.
40
0.
30
0.
20
0.
15
0.
50
re
m
ai
nd
er
41
3.
2
S
12
C
A
04
13
2
11
.0
–1
3.
0
0.
7–
1.
1
0.
10
0.
10
0.
07
...
0.
10
0.
10
0.
10
...
...
0.
20
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
41
3.
1
S
12
A
-B
A
14
13
1
11
.0
–1
3.
0
1.
0
1.
0
0.
35
0.
10
...
0.
50
0.
40
0.
15
...
...
0.
25
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
41
3.
2
...
A
14
13
2
11
.0
–1
3.
0
0.
6
0.
10
0.
05
0.
05
...
0.
05
0.
05
0.
05
...
...
0.
10
re
m
ai
nd
er
C
44
3.
1
S
5C
A
34
43
1
4.
5–
6.
0
1.
0
0.
6
0.
35
0.
10
...
0.
50
0.
40
0.
15
...
...
0.
25
re
m
ai
nd
er
C
44
3.
2
...
A
34
43
2
4.
5–
6.
0
0.
7–
1.
1
0.
10
0.
10
0.
05
...
...
0.
10
...
...
0.
05
0.
15
re
m
ai
nd
er
51
8.
1
G
8A
A
05
18
1
0.
35
1.
0
0.
25
0.
35
7.
6–
8.
5
...
0.
15
0.
15
0.
15
...
...
0.
25
re
m
ai
nd
er
51
8.
2
...
A
05
18
2
0.
25
0.
7
0.
10
0.
10
7.
6–
8.
5
...
0.
05
...
0.
05
...
...
0.
10
re
m
ai
nd
er
A
A
S
T
M
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
w
er
e
es
ta
bl
is
he
d
in
ac
co
rd
an
ce
w
ith
P
ra
ct
ic
e
B
27
5.
A
N
S
Id
es
ig
na
tio
ns
w
er
e
es
ta
bl
is
he
d
in
ac
co
rd
an
ce
w
ith
A
N
S
IH
35
.1
.U
N
S
de
si
gn
at
io
ns
w
er
e
es
ta
bl
is
he
d
in
ac
co
rd
an
ce
w
ith
P
ra
ct
ic
e
E
52
7.
B
“O
th
er
s”
in
cl
ud
es
lis
te
d
el
em
en
ts
fo
r
w
hi
ch
no
sp
ec
ifi
c
lim
it
is
sh
ow
n
as
w
el
la
s
un
lis
te
d
m
et
al
lic
el
em
en
ts
.
T
he
pr
od
uc
er
m
ay
an
al
yz
e
sa
m
pl
es
fo
r
tr
ac
e
el
em
en
ts
no
t
sp
ec
ifi
ed
in
th
e
sp
ec
ifi
ca
tio
n.
H
ow
ev
er
,
su
ch
an
al
ys
is
is
no
t
re
qu
ire
d
an
d
m
ay
no
t
co
ve
r
al
lm
et
al
lic
“O
th
er
s”
el
em
en
ts
.
S
ho
ul
d
an
y
an
al
ys
is
by
th
e
pr
od
uc
er
or
th
e
pu
rc
ha
se
r
es
ta
bl
is
h
th
at
an
“O
th
er
s”
el
em
en
t
ex
ce
ed
s
th
e
lim
it
of
“E
ac
h”
or
th
at
th
e
ag
gr
eg
at
e
of
se
ve
ra
l“
O
th
er
s”
el
em
en
ts
ex
ce
ed
s
th
e
lim
it
of
“T
ot
al
,”
th
e
m
at
er
ia
ls
ha
ll
be
co
ns
id
er
ed
no
nc
on
fo
rm
in
g.
C
O
th
er
E
le
m
ents
—
To
ta
ls
ha
ll
be
th
e
su
m
of
un
sp
ec
ifi
ed
m
et
al
lic
el
em
en
ts
0.
01
0
%
or
m
or
e,
ro
un
de
d
to
th
e
se
co
nd
de
ci
m
al
be
fo
re
de
te
rm
in
in
g
th
e
su
m
.
D
M
n
+
C
r
+
Ti
+
V
0.
02
5
%
m
ax
.
E
A
lu
m
in
um
co
nt
en
t
is
th
e
di
ffe
re
nc
e
be
tw
ee
n
10
0.
00
%
an
d
th
e
su
m
of
al
lo
th
er
m
et
al
lic
el
em
en
ts
pr
es
en
t
in
am
ou
nt
s
of
0.
01
0
%
or
m
or
e
ea
ch
,
ex
pr
es
se
d
to
th
e
se
co
nd
de
ci
m
al
.
F
F
e/
S
ir
at
io
2.
5,
m
in
.
G
F
e/
S
ir
at
io
2.
0,
m
in
.
H
F
e/
S
ir
at
io
1.
5,
m
in
.
B 179 – 03
4
3.2 Additionally, orders for material to this specification
shall include the following information when required by the
purchaser:
3.2.1 Form—the approximate form and weight of each
ingot may be specified by agreement between the purchaser
and the manufacturer, and for molten metal the weight may be
specified,
3.2.2 Whether marking for identification is required, includ-
ing marking pattern if required (Section 13), and
3.2.3 Whether inspection is required at the manufacturer’s
works (see 10.2).
3.2.4 Whether certification is required (see Section 12).
4. Process
4.1 The alloys may be made by any approved process.
5. Quality
5.1 The material covered by this specification shall be of
uniform quality and shall be free from dross, slag, and other
harmful contamination.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The ingots or molten metal shall conform to the chemi-
cal composition limits prescribed in Table 1 or Table 2.
Conformance shall be determined by the manufacturer by
analyzing samples taken at the time the ingots are poured into
molds or as the molten alloy is poured into the crucible(s) prior
to shipment. Conformance may also be determined by the
manufacturer by taking samples from the ingots. If the chemi-
cal composition of the material has been determined during the
course of manufacture, the manufacturer shall not be required
to additionally sample and analyze the ingots or molten metal.
7. Sampling for Determination of Chemical Composition
7.1 The number of samples taken for determination of
chemical composition shall be as follows:
7.1.1 When samples are taken at the time the ingots are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
ingots poured from the same source of molten metal.
7.1.2 If the ingots are shipped in carload lots of the same
alloy, not less than five ingots shall be taken at random from
the carload for sampling. If the shipment is in less than carload
lots, one sample ingot shall be taken for each 6000 lb (2700 kg)
or fraction thereof. When it is deemed necessary, a sample may
be taken from each melt of 500 lb (227 kg) or more of the alloy.
7.1.3 Molten Metal—Samples are taken at the time the
molten metal is poured into the crucible(s) and at least one
sample shall be taken for each group of crucible(s) continu-
ously poured from the same source of molten metal, but unless
otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order at least
one sample shall be taken for every 30 000 lb (13 608 kg) or
fraction thereof.
7.1.4 Samples for determination of chemical composition
shall be taken in accordance with one of the following
methods:
7.1.4.1 Samples for Chemical Analysis—Samples for
chemical analysis shall be taken by sawing, drilling, or milling
ingots or test specimens in such a manner as to be representa-
tive of the material. The weight of a prepared sample shall be
not less than 75 g (see Practice E 88).
7.1.4.2 Samples for Spectrochemical and Other Methods of
Analysis—Sampling for spectrochemical analysis shall be in
accordance with Practices E 716. Samples for other methods of
analysis shall be suitable for the form of material being
analyzed and the type of analytical method used.
8. Methods for Determination of Chemical Composition
8.1 The determination of chemical composition shall be
made in accordance with suitable chemical (Test Methods
E 34) or spectrochemical (Test Methods E 101, E 607, and
E 1251) test methods. Other test methods may be used only
when no published ASTM test method is available. In case of
dispute, the methods of analysis shall be agreed upon between
the producer and the purchaser.
9. Electrical Conductivity
9.1 The control of chemical requirements in Table 1 ensures
the capability of Alloys 100.1, 130.1, 150.1, and 170.1 to meet
rated but not measured minimum conductivity in ingot form.
The rated minimum conductivities are as follows:
Alloy % IACS
100.1 54
130.1 55
150.1 57
170.1 59
10. Inspection
10.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the producer is responsible for the performance of all
inspection and test requirements specified herein. Except as
otherwise specified in the contract or order, the producer may
use his own or any other suitable facilities for the performance
of the inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless
disapproved by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the
right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this
specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to
ensure that material conforms to prescribed requirements.
10.2 If the purchaser desires that inspection be made at the
manufacturer’s works where the material is made, it shall be so
stated in the contract or purchase order.
10.3 If the purchaser elects to have inspection made at the
manufacturer’s works, the manufacturer shall afford the in-
spector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification. All tests and inspection shall be so
conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the works.
11. Rejection
11.1 Material that does not conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected and, if rejected, shall be
replaced by the manufacturer. The full weight of the rejected
material shall be returned to the manufacturer.
12. Certification
12.1 The manufacturer shall on request, furnish to the
purchaser a certificate stating that each lot has been sampled,
B 179 – 03
5
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and
has met the requirements.
13. Marking for Identification
13.1 When identification marking of ingots is specified on
the order, ingots shall be marked in accordance with Practice
B 666/B 666M.
14. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
14.1 The material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
prevent damage in ordinary handling and transportation. The
type of packaging and gross weight of individual containers
shall be left to the discretion of the manufacturer unless
otherwise agreed upon. Packaging methods and containers
shall be so selected as to permit maximum utility of mechanical
equipment in unloading and subsequent handling. Each pack-
age or container shall contain only one size or alloy of material
when packed for shipment unless otherwise agreed upon.
14.2 Each package or container shall be marked with the
purchase order number; quantity; specification number; alloy,
gross, and net weights; and the name of the manufacturer.
14.3 Packages or containers shall be such as to ensure
acceptance by common or other carriers for safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery.
15. Keywords
15.1 aluminum; ingot; molten metal
ANNEX
(Mandatory Information)
A1. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR INCLUSION OF NEW ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOYS IN
THIS SPECIFICATION
A1.1 Prior to acceptance for inclusion in this specification,
the composition of wrought or cast aluminum or aluminum
alloy shall be registered in accordance with ANSI H35.1. The
Aluminum Association holds the Secretariat of ANSI H35
Committee7 and administers the criteria and procedures for
registration.
A1.2 If it is documented that the Aluminum Association
could not or would not register a given composition, an
alternative procedure and the criteria for acceptance shall be as
follows:
A1.2.1 The designationsubmitted for inclusion does not
utilize the same designation system as described in ANSI
H35.1. A designation not in conflict with other designation
systems or a trade name is acceptable.
A1.2.2 The aluminum or aluminum alloy has been offered
for sale in commercial quantities within the prior twelve
months to at least three identifiable users.
A1.2.3 The complete chemical composition limits are sub-
mitted.
A1.2.4 The composition is, in the judgment of the respon-
sible subcommittee, significantly different from that of any
other aluminum or aluminum alloy already in this specifica-
tion.
A1.2.5 For codification purposes, an alloying element is any
element intentionally added for any purpose other than grain
refinement and for which minimum and maximum limits are
specified. Unalloyed aluminum contains a minimum of
99.00 % aluminum.
A1.2.6 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed to the following decimal places:
Less than 0.001 % 0.000X
0.001 to but less than 0.01 % 0.00X
0.01 to but less than 0.10 %
Unalloyed aluminum made by a refining process 0.0XX
Alloys and unalloyed aluminum not made by a refining pro-
cess
0.0X
0.10 through 0.55 % 0.XX
(It is customary to express limits of 0.30 through 0.55 % as
0.X0 or 0.X5.)
Over 0.55 % 0.X, X.X, etc.
(except that combined Si + Fe limits for 99.00 % minimum
aluminum must be expressed as 0.XX or 1.XX)
A1.2.7 Standard limits for alloying elements and impuri-
ties are expressed in the following sequence: Silicon; Iron;
Copper; Manganese; Magnesium; Chromium; Nickel; Zinc
(Note A1.1); Titanium; Other Elements, Each; Other Elements,
Total: Aluminum (Note A1.2).
NOTE A1.1—Additional specified elements having limits are inserted in
alphabetical order of their chemical symbols between zinc and titanium, or
are specified in footnotes.
NOTE A1.2—Aluminum is specified as minimum for unalloyed alumi-
num and as a remainder for aluminum alloys.7 The Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006.
B 179 – 03
6
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 179 – 96)
that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved Apr. 10, 2003.)
(1) Test Method E 227 was removed from the Referenced
Documents section, and references to Test Method E 227 were
removed.
(2) Alloys 208.1, 208.2, and 222.1 were deleted from Table 1.
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).
B 179 – 03
7
Designation: B 199 – 99
Standard Specification for
Magnesium-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 199; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers magnesium alloy permanent
mold casting alloys designated as shown in Table 1.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI values given in parentheses are
provided for information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 275 Practice for Codification of Certain Nonferrous Met-
als and Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 296 Practice for Temper Designations of Magnesium
Alloys, Cast and Wrought2
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products2
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products2
B 661 Practice for Heat Treatment of Magnesium Alloys2
E 8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specification4
E 35 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Magnesium
and Magnesium Alloys5
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition5
E 94 Guide for Radiographic Testing6
E 155 Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminum
and Magnesium Castings6
E 165 Test Methods for Liquid Penetrant Examination6
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)7
2.3 Federal Standards:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)8
2.4 Military Specification:
MIL-M-6857 Heat Treatment of Magnesium Alloy Cast-
ings8
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 permanent mold casting—a metal object produced by
introducing molten metal by gravity or low pressure into a
mold constructed of durable material, usually iron or steel, and
allowing it to solidify.
3.1.2 semipermanent mold casting—a permanent mold cast-
ing which is made using an expendable core such as bonded
sand.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for castings under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each casting,
4.1.2 Alloy (Section 7 and Table 1),
4.1.3 Temper (Section 8 and Table 2),
4.1.4 Minimum properties of specimens cut from castings,
if required (see section 9.3),
4.1.5 Drawing showing dimensions of the castings (the
amount of stock left for machine finish should be indicated),
4.1.6 Surface treatment (see 10.1),
4.1.7 Whether inspection is required at the manufacturer’s
works (see section 11.1.1),
4.1.8 Special inspection requirements (see 11.2),
4.1.9 Whether certification is required (see 13.1), and
4.1.10 Whether marking for identification is required (see
14.1).
5. Manufacture
5.1 The responsibility of furnishing castings that can be laid
out and machined to the finished dimensions within the
permissible variations specified, as shown on the blueprints or
drawings, shall rest with the supplier, except when molds are
furnished by the purchaser. Sufficient stock shall be allowed for
shrinkage, and where requested, for finishing; castings of
excessive weight shall not be furnished.
5.2 The castings may be subjected to the heat treatment
1 This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-7 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.04 on
Magnesium Alloy Cast and Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 1999. Published December 1999. Originally
published as B 199–45T. Last previous edition B 199–87(1993)e1.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 02.02.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 03.01.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 14.02.
5 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 03.05.
6 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 03.03.
7 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 01.01.
8 Available from Standardization DocumentsOrder Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
1
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Limits A
NOTE 1—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is suspected or indicated in amounts greater than
the specified limits, further analysis shall be made to determine that these elements are not present in excess of the specified limits.
NOTE 2—The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value obtained from analysis shall be rounded to
the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit.
Alloy NumberB Composition, %
ASTM UNS Iron Magnesium Aluminum Manganese Zinc Rare Earths Zirconium Silicon Copper Nickel
TotalC
Other
Impuri-
ties
Others
Each
AM100A M10100 ... remainder 9.3 to 10.7 0.10–0.35 0.30 ... ... 0.30 0.10 0.01 0.30 ...
AZ81A M11810 ... remainder 7.0 to 8.1 0.13–0.35 0.40 to 1.0 ... ... 0.30 0.10 0.01 0.30 ...
AZ91C M11914 ... remainder 8.1 to 9.3 0.13–0.35 0.40 to 1.0 ... ... 0.30 0.10 0.01 0.30 ...
AZ91E M11919 0.005D remainder 8.1 to 9.3 0.17–0.35 0.40 to 1.0 ... ... 0.20 0.015 0.0010 0.30 0.01
AZ92A M11920 ... remainder 8.3 to 9.7 0.10–0.35 1.6 to 2.4 ... ... 0.30 0.25 0.01 0.30 ...
EQ21AE M18330 ... remainder ... ... ... 1.5 to 3.0F 0.40 to 1.0 ... 0.05–0.10 0.01 0.30 ...
EZ33A M12330 ... remainder ... ... 2.0 to 3.1 2.5 to 4.0 0.50 to 1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 0.30 ...
QE22AG M18220E ... remainder ... ... ... 1.8 to 2.5F 0.40 to 1.0 ... 0.10 0.01 0.30 ...
A Limits are in weight percent max unless shown as a range or stated otherwise.
B ASTM alloy designations were established in accordance with Practice B 275. UNS designations were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
C Includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown.
D If iron exceeds 0.005 %, the iron to manganese ratio shall not exceed 0.032.
E Silver content for Alloy EQ21A (M18330) shall be 1.3 to 1.7 %.
F Rare earth elements are in the form of didymium.
G Silver content for Alloy QE22A (M18220) shall be 2.0 to 3.0, inclusive.
B
199
2
necessary to produce material that will conform to the require-
ments specified. Heat treatment shall be performed on the
whole of a casting, never on a part only, and shall be applied
in a manner that will produce the utmost uniformity.
6. General Quality
6.1 The castings shall be of uniform quality and condition,
free of cracks or other injurious defects, and shall be well
cleaned by sand blasting or any other approved process before
inspection.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 Limits—The material shall conform to the chemical
composition limits prescribed in Table 1. Conformance shall be
determined by analyzing samples taken when the castings are
poured, or by analyzing samples taken from the finished
product. If the chemical composition has been determined
during the course of manufacture, sampling and analysis of the
finished product is not necessary.
7.2 Number of Samples—The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
7.2.1 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken from each melt of
2000 lb (907 kg) or fraction thereof.
7.2.2 When samples are taken from the castings or test bars,
a sample shall be taken to represent each 2000 lb (907 kg) or
fraction thereof in the shipment except that not more than one
sample shall be required per casting.
7.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples for determination of
chemical composition shall be taken in accordance with one of
the following methods:
7.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
material by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain a weight of prepared
sample not less than 75 g. Sampling shall be in accordance
with Method E 88.
7.3.2 Samples for spectrochemical or other methods of
analysis shall be taken by methods suitable for the form of
material being analyzed and the type of analytical method
used.
7.4 Methods of Chemical Analysis—Any suitable method of
chemical analysis may be used. In case of dispute, the analysis
shall be made by methods given in Methods E 35 or any other
standard methods of analysis approved by ASTM unless some
other method is agreed upon.
8. Heat Treatment
8.1 Unless otherwise specified, heat treatment for the appli-
cable tempers designated in Table 2 shall be in accordance with
Practice B 661 or with Military Specification MIL-M-6857.
9. Tensile Requirements
9.1 Limits—The tension test specimens representing the
castings shall conform to the requirements of Table 2.
9.2 Number of Tests— At least one tension test specimen
shall be cast from each melt of 2 000 lb (907 kg) or fraction
thereof to represent the castings poured from the same melt. If
the castings are to be heat treated, the specimens shall be heat
treated with production castings of the same alloy and in the
same temper as the specimens. The specimens shall then be
tested to judge the response of their corresponding melts to the
type of heat treatment to which the specimens were subjected.
9.2.1 Each heat-treating furnace charge shall include at least
one tension test specimen poured from a production melt. Such
specimens shall be of the same alloy and in the same temper as
the castings, and shall be tested to judge the quality of the
heat-treating operation given the furnace charge.
9.3 If test bars are cut from castings, the number and
location shall be as agreed upon between the supplier and the
purchaser. Depending on the radiographic quality specified
(see 11.4), test bars cut from casting may not meet the
requirements of Table 2. Mechanical property limits from cut
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and yield strength shall be rounded to the
nearest 0.1 ksi and each value for elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 % both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
Alloy Number
TemperA
Tensile Strength, min.
ksi (MPa)
Yield StrengthB (0.2 %
offset) min. ksi (MPa)
Elongation in
2 in., (50.8 mm)
min., %ASTM UNS
AM100A M10100 F 20.0 (138) 10.0 (69) C
T4 34.0 (234) 10.0 (69) 6
T6 34.0 (234) 15.0 (103) 2
T61 34.0 (234) 17.0 (117) C
AZ81A M11810 T4 34.0 (234) 11.0 (76) 7
AZ91C M11914 F 23.0 (158) 11.0 (76) C
T4 34.0 (234) 11.0 (76) 7
T5 23.0 (158) 12.0 (83) 2
T6 34.0 (234) 16.0 (110) 3
AZ91E M11919 T6 34.0 (234) 16.0 (110) ...
AZ92A M11920 F 23.0 (158) 11.0 (76) C
T4 34.0 (234) 11.0 (76) 6
T5 23.0 (158) 12.0 (83) C
T6 34.0 (234) 18.0 (124) C
EQ21A M18330 T6 34.0 (234) 25.0 (172) ...
EZ33A M12330 T5 20.0 (138) 14.0 (96) 2
QE22A M18220 T6 35.0 (241) 25.0 (172) 2
A These temper designations were established in accordance with Practice B 296.
B See X1.3.
C Not required.
B 199
3
bars shall be agreed to by the supplier and purchaser.
9.4 Test Specimens—The tension test specimens shall be
separately cast in a permanent mold and shall be cast to size in
accordance with the dimensions shown in Fig. 8 of Method
B 557. They shall not be machined prior to testing except to
adapt the grip ends to the holders of the testing machine in such
a manner as to ensure an axial load.
9.4.1 If any tension test specimen is improperly machined
or shows flaws upon testing, it may be discarded and another
specimen from the same heat or melt used instead. If no
additional specimen is available, the supplier and the purchaser
shall agree on an alternative procedure.
9.5 Test Methods— The tension tests shall be made in
accordance with Method B 557.
10. Finish
10.1 Depending on casting processing and end use require-
ments, castings should be protected by the use of chrome
pickling, anodizing, resin sealing,or other approved methods
prior to shipment (see X1.4).
11. Inspection
11.1 If the purchaser desires that inspection be made at the
supplier’s works where the material is made, it shall be so
stated in the contract or purchase order.
11.1.1 If the purchaser elects to have the inspection made at
the supplier’s works, the supplier shall afford the inspector
representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
specification. All tests and inspections shall be so conducted as
not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
11.2 Special inspection requirements such as simulated
service, pressure testing, X-ray, or fluorescent penetrant must
be stated on the order.
11.3 Liquid Penetrant Inspection:
11.3.1 When specified, liquid penetrant inspection shall be
in accordance with Practice E 165, and the required sensitivity
shall be specified.
11.3.2 Acceptable standards for discontinuities shall be
agreed upon, including size and frequency per unit area and
location.
11.4 Radiographic Inspection:
11.4.1 When specified, radiographic inspection shall be in
accordance with Methods E 94 and E 155.
11.4.2 Radiographic acceptance shall be in accordance with
requirements selected from Table 3. Any modifications of this
table, the frequency per unit area, and location should also be
agreed upon.
11.4.3 The number, film size, and orientation of radiographs
and the number of castings radiographically inspected shall be
agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
12. Rejection and Retest
12.1 Material failing to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. If rejected, the supplier shall be
responsible only for replacement of the material to the pur-
chaser. As much as possible of the rejected original material
shall be returned to the supplier.
12.2 Retests—If the results of the tension tests of alloys in
heat-treated tempers do not conform to the requirements
prescribed in Table 2, the castings may be re-heat treated once
in an attempt to meet the required properties. The results of
acceptable tests shall conform to the tensile properties require-
ments specified in Table 2. Castings still not conforming after
the re-heat treatment shall be rejected.
13. Certification
13.1 The supplier shall, on request, furnish to the purchaser
a certificate stating that the material has been sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification and has met
the requirements
14. Product Marking
14.1 Unless otherwise specified, each casting shall be
marked with the applicable drawing or part number.
15. Packaging and Package Marking
15.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified: castings shall
be packaged to provide adequate protection during normal
handling and transportation; each package shall contain only
one type of item; and the type of packaging and gross weight
of containers shall be at the supplier’s discretion, provided they
are such as to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers
for safe transportation at the lowest rate to the delivery point.
15.2 Marking—Each shipping container shall be legibly
marked with the purchase order number, gross and net weights,
and the supplier’s name or trademark.
15.3 Preservation— Material intended for prolonged stor-
age in unheated locations shall be adequately packed and
protected to avoid deterioration and damage. When specified in
the contract or purchase order, material shall be preserved,
packaged, and packed in accordance with the requirements of
TABLE 3 Discontinuity-Severity Level Requirements for Magnesium Castings (Reference Radiograph E 155)
Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
Discontinuity Section Thickness, in.
1⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4 1⁄4 3⁄4
Gas Holes none 1 1 2 2 5 5
Microshrinkage (feathery) none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Microshrinkage (sponge) none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Foreign material (less dense) none 1 1 2 2 4 4
Foreign material (more dense) none 1 1 2 2 4 3
Cracks
Cold Shuts
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
Surface irregularity
Core Shift
not to exceed drawing tolerance
not to exceed drawing tolerance
B 199
4
Practices B 660. The applicable levels shall be specified in the
contract or order.
16. Quality Assurance
16.1 Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the supplier is respon-
sible for the performance of all inspection requirements as
specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the contract
or order, the supplier may use his own or any other facilities
suitable for the performance of the inspection requirements
specified herein, unless disapproved by the purchaser. The
purchaser reserves the right to perform any of the inspections
set forth in the specification, where such inspections are
deemed necessary, to assure that supplies and services conform
to the prescribed requirements.
17. Keywords
17.1 casting grade; certification; chemical compositions;
ductility; gravity die castings; low pressure die castings;
ordering information; rejection criteria; strength requirements;
tensile properties
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. EXPLANATORY NOTES
X1.1 General Information
X1.1.1 Property limits in Table 2 are based on an analysis of
data from separately cast tension test bars and are established
at a level at which at least 99 % of the population of the values
meets the established value.
X1.1.2 Alloy AM100A has a specific gravity of about 1.81.
It is used both in the solution heat-treated and in the solution
heat-treated and aged tempers. Aging increases the yield
strength and hardness and decreases the toughness and elon-
gation.
X1.1.3 Alloy AZ81A has a specific gravity of about 1.80. It
is used primarily in the solution heat-treated temper. This alloy
will produce castings having maximum soundness with mod-
erate mechanical properties.
X1.1.4 Alloy AZ91C has a specific gravity of about 1.81. It
should be used for those applications requiring the maximum
of strength and hardness as well as ductility.
X1.1.5 Alloy AZ91E is a high purity version of AZ91C. As
a result it has very high corrosion resistance to salt water
(NaCl) corrosion.
X1.1.6 Alloy EQ21A has a specific gravity of about 1.81. It
has lower silver content than Alloy QE22A but similar me-
chanical properties.
X1.1.7 Alloy AZ92A has a specific gravity of about 1.82. It
is used where good soundness and mechanical properties are
required. The alloy is heat treatable and is then characterized
by high strength and hardness. Under service conditions where
the castings attain a temperature of 200°F (93°C) or higher, the
castings of Alloy AZ92A, heat treated, will gradually change to
the heat treated and aged temper.
X1.1.8 Alloy EZ33A has a specific gravity of about 1.84. It
is used in the artificially-aged temper. It is recommended for
use at elevated temperatures, especially in the range of 300 to
500°F (149 to 260°C). This alloy will produce sound castings
for pressure tightness.
X1.1.9 Alloy QE22A has a specific gravity of about 1.82. It
is used primarily where a high yield strength is needed at
temperatures up to 400°F (204°C).
X1.2 Properties and Characteristics
X1.2.1 The data on properties and characteristics given in
Table X1.1 are approximate and are supplied for general
information only.
X1.3 Yield Strength and Brinell Hardness
X1.3.1 The yield strength of magnesium-base alloys is
defined as the stress at which the stress-strain curve deviates
0.2 % from the modulus line. It may be determined by the
“offset method” or the “extension-under-load method” (the
latter is often referred to as the “approximate method without
the stress-strain diagram”) as described in Methods E 8. In case
of dispute, the “offset method” shall be used. The data in Table
X1.2 gives minimum yield strength values for the various
alloys, together with the corresponding unit deformations for
use with the “extension-under-load method” based on a modu-
lus of elasticity, E5 6 500 ksi (44